Bug Summary

File:src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/CodeGen/WinEHPrepare.cpp
Warning:line 212, column 30
Called C++ object pointer is null

Annotated Source Code

Press '?' to see keyboard shortcuts

clang -cc1 -cc1 -triple amd64-unknown-openbsd7.0 -analyze -disable-free -disable-llvm-verifier -discard-value-names -main-file-name WinEHPrepare.cpp -analyzer-store=region -analyzer-opt-analyze-nested-blocks -analyzer-checker=core -analyzer-checker=apiModeling -analyzer-checker=unix -analyzer-checker=deadcode -analyzer-checker=cplusplus -analyzer-checker=security.insecureAPI.UncheckedReturn -analyzer-checker=security.insecureAPI.getpw -analyzer-checker=security.insecureAPI.gets -analyzer-checker=security.insecureAPI.mktemp -analyzer-checker=security.insecureAPI.mkstemp -analyzer-checker=security.insecureAPI.vfork -analyzer-checker=nullability.NullPassedToNonnull -analyzer-checker=nullability.NullReturnedFromNonnull -analyzer-output plist -w -setup-static-analyzer -mrelocation-model pic -pic-level 1 -fhalf-no-semantic-interposition -mframe-pointer=all -relaxed-aliasing -fno-rounding-math -mconstructor-aliases -munwind-tables -target-cpu x86-64 -tune-cpu generic -debugger-tuning=gdb -fcoverage-compilation-dir=/usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj -resource-dir /usr/local/lib/clang/13.0.0 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/AMDGPU -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Analysis -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/ASMParser -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/BinaryFormat -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Bitcode -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Bitcode -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Bitstream -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms -I /include/llvm/CodeGen -I /include/llvm/CodeGen/PBQP -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/IR -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/IR -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms/Coroutines -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/ProfileData/Coverage -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/DebugInfo/CodeView -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/DebugInfo/DWARF -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/DebugInfo -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/DebugInfo/MSF -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/DebugInfo/PDB -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Demangle -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/ExecutionEngine -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/ExecutionEngine/JITLink -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/ExecutionEngine/Orc -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Frontend -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Frontend/OpenACC -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Frontend -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Frontend/OpenMP -I /include/llvm/CodeGen/GlobalISel -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/IRReader -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms/InstCombine -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/Transforms/InstCombine -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/LTO -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Linker -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/MC -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/MC/MCParser -I /include/llvm/CodeGen/MIRParser -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Object -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Option -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Passes -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/ -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/ProfileData -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms/Scalar -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/ADT -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Support -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/DebugInfo/Symbolize -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Target -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms/Utils -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms/Vectorize -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/X86 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/X86 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/X86 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/X86 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/X86 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/X86 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/X86 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/X86 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include/llvm/X86 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/Target/X86 -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Transforms/IPO -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../include -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj -I /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj/../include -D NDEBUG -D __STDC_LIMIT_MACROS -D __STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS -D __STDC_FORMAT_MACROS -D LLVM_PREFIX="/usr" -D PIC -internal-isystem /usr/include/c++/v1 -internal-isystem /usr/local/lib/clang/13.0.0/include -internal-externc-isystem /usr/include -O2 -Wno-unused-parameter -Wwrite-strings -Wno-missing-field-initializers -Wno-long-long -Wno-comment -std=c++14 -fdeprecated-macro -fdebug-compilation-dir=/usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/obj -ferror-limit 19 -fvisibility-inlines-hidden -fwrapv -D_RET_PROTECTOR -ret-protector -fno-rtti -fgnuc-version=4.2.1 -vectorize-loops -vectorize-slp -fno-builtin-malloc -fno-builtin-calloc -fno-builtin-realloc -fno-builtin-valloc -fno-builtin-free -fno-builtin-strdup -fno-builtin-strndup -analyzer-output=html -faddrsig -D__GCC_HAVE_DWARF2_CFI_ASM=1 -o /home/ben/Projects/vmm/scan-build/2022-01-12-194120-40624-1 -x c++ /usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/CodeGen/WinEHPrepare.cpp

/usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/lib/CodeGen/WinEHPrepare.cpp

1//===-- WinEHPrepare - Prepare exception handling for code generation ---===//
2//
3// Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions.
4// See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information.
5// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception
6//
7//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
8//
9// This pass lowers LLVM IR exception handling into something closer to what the
10// backend wants for functions using a personality function from a runtime
11// provided by MSVC. Functions with other personality functions are left alone
12// and may be prepared by other passes. In particular, all supported MSVC
13// personality functions require cleanup code to be outlined, and the C++
14// personality requires catch handler code to be outlined.
15//
16//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
17
18#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/MapVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/Triple.h"
22#include "llvm/Analysis/CFG.h"
23#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
24#include "llvm/CodeGen/MachineBasicBlock.h"
25#include "llvm/CodeGen/Passes.h"
26#include "llvm/CodeGen/WinEHFuncInfo.h"
27#include "llvm/IR/Verifier.h"
28#include "llvm/InitializePasses.h"
29#include "llvm/MC/MCSymbol.h"
30#include "llvm/Pass.h"
31#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
32#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
33#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
34#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
35#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Cloning.h"
36#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
37#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SSAUpdater.h"
38
39using namespace llvm;
40
41#define DEBUG_TYPE"winehprepare" "winehprepare"
42
43static cl::opt<bool> DisableDemotion(
44 "disable-demotion", cl::Hidden,
45 cl::desc(
46 "Clone multicolor basic blocks but do not demote cross scopes"),
47 cl::init(false));
48
49static cl::opt<bool> DisableCleanups(
50 "disable-cleanups", cl::Hidden,
51 cl::desc("Do not remove implausible terminators or other similar cleanups"),
52 cl::init(false));
53
54static cl::opt<bool> DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnlyOpt(
55 "demote-catchswitch-only", cl::Hidden,
56 cl::desc("Demote catchswitch BBs only (for wasm EH)"), cl::init(false));
57
58namespace {
59
60class WinEHPrepare : public FunctionPass {
61public:
62 static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid.
63 WinEHPrepare(bool DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnly = false)
64 : FunctionPass(ID), DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnly(DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnly) {}
65
66 bool runOnFunction(Function &Fn) override;
67
68 bool doFinalization(Module &M) override;
69
70 void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const override;
71
72 StringRef getPassName() const override {
73 return "Windows exception handling preparation";
74 }
75
76private:
77 void insertPHIStores(PHINode *OriginalPHI, AllocaInst *SpillSlot);
78 void
79 insertPHIStore(BasicBlock *PredBlock, Value *PredVal, AllocaInst *SpillSlot,
80 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<BasicBlock *, Value *>> &Worklist);
81 AllocaInst *insertPHILoads(PHINode *PN, Function &F);
82 void replaceUseWithLoad(Value *V, Use &U, AllocaInst *&SpillSlot,
83 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, Value *> &Loads, Function &F);
84 bool prepareExplicitEH(Function &F);
85 void colorFunclets(Function &F);
86
87 void demotePHIsOnFunclets(Function &F, bool DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnly);
88 void cloneCommonBlocks(Function &F);
89 void removeImplausibleInstructions(Function &F);
90 void cleanupPreparedFunclets(Function &F);
91 void verifyPreparedFunclets(Function &F);
92
93 bool DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnly;
94
95 // All fields are reset by runOnFunction.
96 EHPersonality Personality = EHPersonality::Unknown;
97
98 const DataLayout *DL = nullptr;
99 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, ColorVector> BlockColors;
100 MapVector<BasicBlock *, std::vector<BasicBlock *>> FuncletBlocks;
101};
102
103} // end anonymous namespace
104
105char WinEHPrepare::ID = 0;
106INITIALIZE_PASS(WinEHPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE, "Prepare Windows exceptions",static void *initializeWinEHPreparePassOnce(PassRegistry &
Registry) { PassInfo *PI = new PassInfo( "Prepare Windows exceptions"
, "winehprepare", &WinEHPrepare::ID, PassInfo::NormalCtor_t
(callDefaultCtor<WinEHPrepare>), false, false); Registry
.registerPass(*PI, true); return PI; } static llvm::once_flag
InitializeWinEHPreparePassFlag; void llvm::initializeWinEHPreparePass
(PassRegistry &Registry) { llvm::call_once(InitializeWinEHPreparePassFlag
, initializeWinEHPreparePassOnce, std::ref(Registry)); }
107 false, false)static void *initializeWinEHPreparePassOnce(PassRegistry &
Registry) { PassInfo *PI = new PassInfo( "Prepare Windows exceptions"
, "winehprepare", &WinEHPrepare::ID, PassInfo::NormalCtor_t
(callDefaultCtor<WinEHPrepare>), false, false); Registry
.registerPass(*PI, true); return PI; } static llvm::once_flag
InitializeWinEHPreparePassFlag; void llvm::initializeWinEHPreparePass
(PassRegistry &Registry) { llvm::call_once(InitializeWinEHPreparePassFlag
, initializeWinEHPreparePassOnce, std::ref(Registry)); }
108
109FunctionPass *llvm::createWinEHPass(bool DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnly) {
110 return new WinEHPrepare(DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnly);
111}
112
113bool WinEHPrepare::runOnFunction(Function &Fn) {
114 if (!Fn.hasPersonalityFn())
115 return false;
116
117 // Classify the personality to see what kind of preparation we need.
118 Personality = classifyEHPersonality(Fn.getPersonalityFn());
119
120 // Do nothing if this is not a scope-based personality.
121 if (!isScopedEHPersonality(Personality))
122 return false;
123
124 DL = &Fn.getParent()->getDataLayout();
125 return prepareExplicitEH(Fn);
126}
127
128bool WinEHPrepare::doFinalization(Module &M) { return false; }
129
130void WinEHPrepare::getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const {}
131
132static int addUnwindMapEntry(WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo, int ToState,
133 const BasicBlock *BB) {
134 CxxUnwindMapEntry UME;
135 UME.ToState = ToState;
136 UME.Cleanup = BB;
137 FuncInfo.CxxUnwindMap.push_back(UME);
138 return FuncInfo.getLastStateNumber();
139}
140
141static void addTryBlockMapEntry(WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo, int TryLow,
142 int TryHigh, int CatchHigh,
143 ArrayRef<const CatchPadInst *> Handlers) {
144 WinEHTryBlockMapEntry TBME;
145 TBME.TryLow = TryLow;
146 TBME.TryHigh = TryHigh;
147 TBME.CatchHigh = CatchHigh;
148 assert(TBME.TryLow <= TBME.TryHigh)((void)0);
149 for (const CatchPadInst *CPI : Handlers) {
150 WinEHHandlerType HT;
151 Constant *TypeInfo = cast<Constant>(CPI->getArgOperand(0));
152 if (TypeInfo->isNullValue())
153 HT.TypeDescriptor = nullptr;
154 else
155 HT.TypeDescriptor = cast<GlobalVariable>(TypeInfo->stripPointerCasts());
156 HT.Adjectives = cast<ConstantInt>(CPI->getArgOperand(1))->getZExtValue();
157 HT.Handler = CPI->getParent();
158 if (auto *AI =
159 dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(CPI->getArgOperand(2)->stripPointerCasts()))
160 HT.CatchObj.Alloca = AI;
161 else
162 HT.CatchObj.Alloca = nullptr;
163 TBME.HandlerArray.push_back(HT);
164 }
165 FuncInfo.TryBlockMap.push_back(TBME);
166}
167
168static BasicBlock *getCleanupRetUnwindDest(const CleanupPadInst *CleanupPad) {
169 for (const User *U : CleanupPad->users())
170 if (const auto *CRI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(U))
171 return CRI->getUnwindDest();
172 return nullptr;
173}
174
175static void calculateStateNumbersForInvokes(const Function *Fn,
176 WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo) {
177 auto *F = const_cast<Function *>(Fn);
178 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, ColorVector> BlockColors = colorEHFunclets(*F);
179 for (BasicBlock &BB : *F) {
180 auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(BB.getTerminator());
6
Assuming the object is a 'InvokeInst'
181 if (!II
6.1
'II' is non-null
6.1
'II' is non-null
6.1
'II' is non-null
)
7
Taking false branch
182 continue;
183
184 auto &BBColors = BlockColors[&BB];
185 assert(BBColors.size() == 1 && "multi-color BB not removed by preparation")((void)0);
186 BasicBlock *FuncletEntryBB = BBColors.front();
187
188 BasicBlock *FuncletUnwindDest;
189 auto *FuncletPad =
190 dyn_cast<FuncletPadInst>(FuncletEntryBB->getFirstNonPHI());
8
Assuming the object is not a 'FuncletPadInst'
191 assert(FuncletPad || FuncletEntryBB == &Fn->getEntryBlock())((void)0);
192 if (!FuncletPad
8.1
'FuncletPad' is null
8.1
'FuncletPad' is null
8.1
'FuncletPad' is null
)
9
Taking true branch
193 FuncletUnwindDest = nullptr;
194 else if (auto *CatchPad = dyn_cast<CatchPadInst>(FuncletPad))
195 FuncletUnwindDest = CatchPad->getCatchSwitch()->getUnwindDest();
196 else if (auto *CleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(FuncletPad))
197 FuncletUnwindDest = getCleanupRetUnwindDest(CleanupPad);
198 else
199 llvm_unreachable("unexpected funclet pad!")__builtin_unreachable();
200
201 BasicBlock *InvokeUnwindDest = II->getUnwindDest();
10
Calling 'InvokeInst::getUnwindDest'
24
Returning from 'InvokeInst::getUnwindDest'
25
'InvokeUnwindDest' initialized here
202 int BaseState = -1;
203 if (FuncletUnwindDest == InvokeUnwindDest) {
26
Assuming 'FuncletUnwindDest' is equal to 'InvokeUnwindDest'
27
Taking true branch
204 auto BaseStateI = FuncInfo.FuncletBaseStateMap.find(FuncletPad);
205 if (BaseStateI != FuncInfo.FuncletBaseStateMap.end())
28
Taking false branch
206 BaseState = BaseStateI->second;
207 }
208
209 if (BaseState != -1) {
29
Taking false branch
210 FuncInfo.InvokeStateMap[II] = BaseState;
211 } else {
212 Instruction *PadInst = InvokeUnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI();
30
Called C++ object pointer is null
213 assert(FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap.count(PadInst) && "EH Pad has no state!")((void)0);
214 FuncInfo.InvokeStateMap[II] = FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[PadInst];
215 }
216 }
217}
218
219// Given BB which ends in an unwind edge, return the EHPad that this BB belongs
220// to. If the unwind edge came from an invoke, return null.
221static const BasicBlock *getEHPadFromPredecessor(const BasicBlock *BB,
222 Value *ParentPad) {
223 const Instruction *TI = BB->getTerminator();
224 if (isa<InvokeInst>(TI))
225 return nullptr;
226 if (auto *CatchSwitch = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
227 if (CatchSwitch->getParentPad() != ParentPad)
228 return nullptr;
229 return BB;
230 }
231 assert(!TI->isEHPad() && "unexpected EHPad!")((void)0);
232 auto *CleanupPad = cast<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)->getCleanupPad();
233 if (CleanupPad->getParentPad() != ParentPad)
234 return nullptr;
235 return CleanupPad->getParent();
236}
237
238// Starting from a EHPad, Backward walk through control-flow graph
239// to produce two primary outputs:
240// FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[] and FuncInfo.CxxUnwindMap[]
241static void calculateCXXStateNumbers(WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo,
242 const Instruction *FirstNonPHI,
243 int ParentState) {
244 const BasicBlock *BB = FirstNonPHI->getParent();
245 assert(BB->isEHPad() && "not a funclet!")((void)0);
246
247 if (auto *CatchSwitch = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(FirstNonPHI)) {
248 assert(FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap.count(CatchSwitch) == 0 &&((void)0)
249 "shouldn't revist catch funclets!")((void)0);
250
251 SmallVector<const CatchPadInst *, 2> Handlers;
252 for (const BasicBlock *CatchPadBB : CatchSwitch->handlers()) {
253 auto *CatchPad = cast<CatchPadInst>(CatchPadBB->getFirstNonPHI());
254 Handlers.push_back(CatchPad);
255 }
256 int TryLow = addUnwindMapEntry(FuncInfo, ParentState, nullptr);
257 FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[CatchSwitch] = TryLow;
258 for (const BasicBlock *PredBlock : predecessors(BB))
259 if ((PredBlock = getEHPadFromPredecessor(PredBlock,
260 CatchSwitch->getParentPad())))
261 calculateCXXStateNumbers(FuncInfo, PredBlock->getFirstNonPHI(),
262 TryLow);
263 int CatchLow = addUnwindMapEntry(FuncInfo, ParentState, nullptr);
264
265 // catchpads are separate funclets in C++ EH due to the way rethrow works.
266 int TryHigh = CatchLow - 1;
267
268 // MSVC FrameHandler3/4 on x64&Arm64 expect Catch Handlers in $tryMap$
269 // stored in pre-order (outer first, inner next), not post-order
270 // Add to map here. Fix the CatchHigh after children are processed
271 const Module *Mod = BB->getParent()->getParent();
272 bool IsPreOrder = Triple(Mod->getTargetTriple()).isArch64Bit();
273 if (IsPreOrder)
274 addTryBlockMapEntry(FuncInfo, TryLow, TryHigh, CatchLow, Handlers);
275 unsigned TBMEIdx = FuncInfo.TryBlockMap.size() - 1;
276
277 for (const auto *CatchPad : Handlers) {
278 FuncInfo.FuncletBaseStateMap[CatchPad] = CatchLow;
279 for (const User *U : CatchPad->users()) {
280 const auto *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U);
281 if (auto *InnerCatchSwitch = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(UserI)) {
282 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = InnerCatchSwitch->getUnwindDest();
283 if (!UnwindDest || UnwindDest == CatchSwitch->getUnwindDest())
284 calculateCXXStateNumbers(FuncInfo, UserI, CatchLow);
285 }
286 if (auto *InnerCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(UserI)) {
287 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = getCleanupRetUnwindDest(InnerCleanupPad);
288 // If a nested cleanup pad reports a null unwind destination and the
289 // enclosing catch pad doesn't it must be post-dominated by an
290 // unreachable instruction.
291 if (!UnwindDest || UnwindDest == CatchSwitch->getUnwindDest())
292 calculateCXXStateNumbers(FuncInfo, UserI, CatchLow);
293 }
294 }
295 }
296 int CatchHigh = FuncInfo.getLastStateNumber();
297 // Now child Catches are processed, update CatchHigh
298 if (IsPreOrder)
299 FuncInfo.TryBlockMap[TBMEIdx].CatchHigh = CatchHigh;
300 else // PostOrder
301 addTryBlockMapEntry(FuncInfo, TryLow, TryHigh, CatchHigh, Handlers);
302
303 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "TryLow[" << BB->getName() << "]: " << TryLow << '\n')do { } while (false);
304 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "TryHigh[" << BB->getName() << "]: " << TryHighdo { } while (false)
305 << '\n')do { } while (false);
306 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CatchHigh[" << BB->getName() << "]: " << CatchHighdo { } while (false)
307 << '\n')do { } while (false);
308 } else {
309 auto *CleanupPad = cast<CleanupPadInst>(FirstNonPHI);
310
311 // It's possible for a cleanup to be visited twice: it might have multiple
312 // cleanupret instructions.
313 if (FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap.count(CleanupPad))
314 return;
315
316 int CleanupState = addUnwindMapEntry(FuncInfo, ParentState, BB);
317 FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[CleanupPad] = CleanupState;
318 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assigning state #" << CleanupState << " to BB "do { } while (false)
319 << BB->getName() << '\n')do { } while (false);
320 for (const BasicBlock *PredBlock : predecessors(BB)) {
321 if ((PredBlock = getEHPadFromPredecessor(PredBlock,
322 CleanupPad->getParentPad()))) {
323 calculateCXXStateNumbers(FuncInfo, PredBlock->getFirstNonPHI(),
324 CleanupState);
325 }
326 }
327 for (const User *U : CleanupPad->users()) {
328 const auto *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U);
329 if (UserI->isEHPad())
330 report_fatal_error("Cleanup funclets for the MSVC++ personality cannot "
331 "contain exceptional actions");
332 }
333 }
334}
335
336static int addSEHExcept(WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo, int ParentState,
337 const Function *Filter, const BasicBlock *Handler) {
338 SEHUnwindMapEntry Entry;
339 Entry.ToState = ParentState;
340 Entry.IsFinally = false;
341 Entry.Filter = Filter;
342 Entry.Handler = Handler;
343 FuncInfo.SEHUnwindMap.push_back(Entry);
344 return FuncInfo.SEHUnwindMap.size() - 1;
345}
346
347static int addSEHFinally(WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo, int ParentState,
348 const BasicBlock *Handler) {
349 SEHUnwindMapEntry Entry;
350 Entry.ToState = ParentState;
351 Entry.IsFinally = true;
352 Entry.Filter = nullptr;
353 Entry.Handler = Handler;
354 FuncInfo.SEHUnwindMap.push_back(Entry);
355 return FuncInfo.SEHUnwindMap.size() - 1;
356}
357
358// Starting from a EHPad, Backward walk through control-flow graph
359// to produce two primary outputs:
360// FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[] and FuncInfo.SEHUnwindMap[]
361static void calculateSEHStateNumbers(WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo,
362 const Instruction *FirstNonPHI,
363 int ParentState) {
364 const BasicBlock *BB = FirstNonPHI->getParent();
365 assert(BB->isEHPad() && "no a funclet!")((void)0);
366
367 if (auto *CatchSwitch = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(FirstNonPHI)) {
368 assert(FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap.count(CatchSwitch) == 0 &&((void)0)
369 "shouldn't revist catch funclets!")((void)0);
370
371 // Extract the filter function and the __except basic block and create a
372 // state for them.
373 assert(CatchSwitch->getNumHandlers() == 1 &&((void)0)
374 "SEH doesn't have multiple handlers per __try")((void)0);
375 const auto *CatchPad =
376 cast<CatchPadInst>((*CatchSwitch->handler_begin())->getFirstNonPHI());
377 const BasicBlock *CatchPadBB = CatchPad->getParent();
378 const Constant *FilterOrNull =
379 cast<Constant>(CatchPad->getArgOperand(0)->stripPointerCasts());
380 const Function *Filter = dyn_cast<Function>(FilterOrNull);
381 assert((Filter || FilterOrNull->isNullValue()) &&((void)0)
382 "unexpected filter value")((void)0);
383 int TryState = addSEHExcept(FuncInfo, ParentState, Filter, CatchPadBB);
384
385 // Everything in the __try block uses TryState as its parent state.
386 FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[CatchSwitch] = TryState;
387 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assigning state #" << TryState << " to BB "do { } while (false)
388 << CatchPadBB->getName() << '\n')do { } while (false);
389 for (const BasicBlock *PredBlock : predecessors(BB))
390 if ((PredBlock = getEHPadFromPredecessor(PredBlock,
391 CatchSwitch->getParentPad())))
392 calculateSEHStateNumbers(FuncInfo, PredBlock->getFirstNonPHI(),
393 TryState);
394
395 // Everything in the __except block unwinds to ParentState, just like code
396 // outside the __try.
397 for (const User *U : CatchPad->users()) {
398 const auto *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U);
399 if (auto *InnerCatchSwitch = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(UserI)) {
400 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = InnerCatchSwitch->getUnwindDest();
401 if (!UnwindDest || UnwindDest == CatchSwitch->getUnwindDest())
402 calculateSEHStateNumbers(FuncInfo, UserI, ParentState);
403 }
404 if (auto *InnerCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(UserI)) {
405 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = getCleanupRetUnwindDest(InnerCleanupPad);
406 // If a nested cleanup pad reports a null unwind destination and the
407 // enclosing catch pad doesn't it must be post-dominated by an
408 // unreachable instruction.
409 if (!UnwindDest || UnwindDest == CatchSwitch->getUnwindDest())
410 calculateSEHStateNumbers(FuncInfo, UserI, ParentState);
411 }
412 }
413 } else {
414 auto *CleanupPad = cast<CleanupPadInst>(FirstNonPHI);
415
416 // It's possible for a cleanup to be visited twice: it might have multiple
417 // cleanupret instructions.
418 if (FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap.count(CleanupPad))
419 return;
420
421 int CleanupState = addSEHFinally(FuncInfo, ParentState, BB);
422 FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[CleanupPad] = CleanupState;
423 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assigning state #" << CleanupState << " to BB "do { } while (false)
424 << BB->getName() << '\n')do { } while (false);
425 for (const BasicBlock *PredBlock : predecessors(BB))
426 if ((PredBlock =
427 getEHPadFromPredecessor(PredBlock, CleanupPad->getParentPad())))
428 calculateSEHStateNumbers(FuncInfo, PredBlock->getFirstNonPHI(),
429 CleanupState);
430 for (const User *U : CleanupPad->users()) {
431 const auto *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U);
432 if (UserI->isEHPad())
433 report_fatal_error("Cleanup funclets for the SEH personality cannot "
434 "contain exceptional actions");
435 }
436 }
437}
438
439static bool isTopLevelPadForMSVC(const Instruction *EHPad) {
440 if (auto *CatchSwitch = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(EHPad))
441 return isa<ConstantTokenNone>(CatchSwitch->getParentPad()) &&
442 CatchSwitch->unwindsToCaller();
443 if (auto *CleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(EHPad))
444 return isa<ConstantTokenNone>(CleanupPad->getParentPad()) &&
445 getCleanupRetUnwindDest(CleanupPad) == nullptr;
446 if (isa<CatchPadInst>(EHPad))
447 return false;
448 llvm_unreachable("unexpected EHPad!")__builtin_unreachable();
449}
450
451void llvm::calculateSEHStateNumbers(const Function *Fn,
452 WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo) {
453 // Don't compute state numbers twice.
454 if (!FuncInfo.SEHUnwindMap.empty())
455 return;
456
457 for (const BasicBlock &BB : *Fn) {
458 if (!BB.isEHPad())
459 continue;
460 const Instruction *FirstNonPHI = BB.getFirstNonPHI();
461 if (!isTopLevelPadForMSVC(FirstNonPHI))
462 continue;
463 ::calculateSEHStateNumbers(FuncInfo, FirstNonPHI, -1);
464 }
465
466 calculateStateNumbersForInvokes(Fn, FuncInfo);
467}
468
469void llvm::calculateWinCXXEHStateNumbers(const Function *Fn,
470 WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo) {
471 // Return if it's already been done.
472 if (!FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap.empty())
473 return;
474
475 for (const BasicBlock &BB : *Fn) {
476 if (!BB.isEHPad())
477 continue;
478 const Instruction *FirstNonPHI = BB.getFirstNonPHI();
479 if (!isTopLevelPadForMSVC(FirstNonPHI))
480 continue;
481 calculateCXXStateNumbers(FuncInfo, FirstNonPHI, -1);
482 }
483
484 calculateStateNumbersForInvokes(Fn, FuncInfo);
485}
486
487static int addClrEHHandler(WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo, int HandlerParentState,
488 int TryParentState, ClrHandlerType HandlerType,
489 uint32_t TypeToken, const BasicBlock *Handler) {
490 ClrEHUnwindMapEntry Entry;
491 Entry.HandlerParentState = HandlerParentState;
492 Entry.TryParentState = TryParentState;
493 Entry.Handler = Handler;
494 Entry.HandlerType = HandlerType;
495 Entry.TypeToken = TypeToken;
496 FuncInfo.ClrEHUnwindMap.push_back(Entry);
497 return FuncInfo.ClrEHUnwindMap.size() - 1;
498}
499
500void llvm::calculateClrEHStateNumbers(const Function *Fn,
501 WinEHFuncInfo &FuncInfo) {
502 // Return if it's already been done.
503 if (!FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap.empty())
1
Assuming the condition is false
2
Taking false branch
504 return;
505
506 // This numbering assigns one state number to each catchpad and cleanuppad.
507 // It also computes two tree-like relations over states:
508 // 1) Each state has a "HandlerParentState", which is the state of the next
509 // outer handler enclosing this state's handler (same as nearest ancestor
510 // per the ParentPad linkage on EH pads, but skipping over catchswitches).
511 // 2) Each state has a "TryParentState", which:
512 // a) for a catchpad that's not the last handler on its catchswitch, is
513 // the state of the next catchpad on that catchswitch
514 // b) for all other pads, is the state of the pad whose try region is the
515 // next outer try region enclosing this state's try region. The "try
516 // regions are not present as such in the IR, but will be inferred
517 // based on the placement of invokes and pads which reach each other
518 // by exceptional exits
519 // Catchswitches do not get their own states, but each gets mapped to the
520 // state of its first catchpad.
521
522 // Step one: walk down from outermost to innermost funclets, assigning each
523 // catchpad and cleanuppad a state number. Add an entry to the
524 // ClrEHUnwindMap for each state, recording its HandlerParentState and
525 // handler attributes. Record the TryParentState as well for each catchpad
526 // that's not the last on its catchswitch, but initialize all other entries'
527 // TryParentStates to a sentinel -1 value that the next pass will update.
528
529 // Seed a worklist with pads that have no parent.
530 SmallVector<std::pair<const Instruction *, int>, 8> Worklist;
531 for (const BasicBlock &BB : *Fn) {
532 const Instruction *FirstNonPHI = BB.getFirstNonPHI();
533 const Value *ParentPad;
534 if (const auto *CPI = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(FirstNonPHI))
535 ParentPad = CPI->getParentPad();
536 else if (const auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(FirstNonPHI))
537 ParentPad = CSI->getParentPad();
538 else
539 continue;
540 if (isa<ConstantTokenNone>(ParentPad))
541 Worklist.emplace_back(FirstNonPHI, -1);
542 }
543
544 // Use the worklist to visit all pads, from outer to inner. Record
545 // HandlerParentState for all pads. Record TryParentState only for catchpads
546 // that aren't the last on their catchswitch (setting all other entries'
547 // TryParentStates to an initial value of -1). This loop is also responsible
548 // for setting the EHPadStateMap entry for all catchpads, cleanuppads, and
549 // catchswitches.
550 while (!Worklist.empty()) {
3
Loop condition is false. Execution continues on line 604
551 const Instruction *Pad;
552 int HandlerParentState;
553 std::tie(Pad, HandlerParentState) = Worklist.pop_back_val();
554
555 if (const auto *Cleanup = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(Pad)) {
556 // Create the entry for this cleanup with the appropriate handler
557 // properties. Finally and fault handlers are distinguished by arity.
558 ClrHandlerType HandlerType =
559 (Cleanup->getNumArgOperands() ? ClrHandlerType::Fault
560 : ClrHandlerType::Finally);
561 int CleanupState = addClrEHHandler(FuncInfo, HandlerParentState, -1,
562 HandlerType, 0, Pad->getParent());
563 // Queue any child EH pads on the worklist.
564 for (const User *U : Cleanup->users())
565 if (const auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(U))
566 if (I->isEHPad())
567 Worklist.emplace_back(I, CleanupState);
568 // Remember this pad's state.
569 FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[Cleanup] = CleanupState;
570 } else {
571 // Walk the handlers of this catchswitch in reverse order since all but
572 // the last need to set the following one as its TryParentState.
573 const auto *CatchSwitch = cast<CatchSwitchInst>(Pad);
574 int CatchState = -1, FollowerState = -1;
575 SmallVector<const BasicBlock *, 4> CatchBlocks(CatchSwitch->handlers());
576 for (auto CBI = CatchBlocks.rbegin(), CBE = CatchBlocks.rend();
577 CBI != CBE; ++CBI, FollowerState = CatchState) {
578 const BasicBlock *CatchBlock = *CBI;
579 // Create the entry for this catch with the appropriate handler
580 // properties.
581 const auto *Catch = cast<CatchPadInst>(CatchBlock->getFirstNonPHI());
582 uint32_t TypeToken = static_cast<uint32_t>(
583 cast<ConstantInt>(Catch->getArgOperand(0))->getZExtValue());
584 CatchState =
585 addClrEHHandler(FuncInfo, HandlerParentState, FollowerState,
586 ClrHandlerType::Catch, TypeToken, CatchBlock);
587 // Queue any child EH pads on the worklist.
588 for (const User *U : Catch->users())
589 if (const auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(U))
590 if (I->isEHPad())
591 Worklist.emplace_back(I, CatchState);
592 // Remember this catch's state.
593 FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[Catch] = CatchState;
594 }
595 // Associate the catchswitch with the state of its first catch.
596 assert(CatchSwitch->getNumHandlers())((void)0);
597 FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[CatchSwitch] = CatchState;
598 }
599 }
600
601 // Step two: record the TryParentState of each state. For cleanuppads that
602 // don't have cleanuprets, we may need to infer this from their child pads,
603 // so visit pads in descendant-most to ancestor-most order.
604 for (auto Entry = FuncInfo.ClrEHUnwindMap.rbegin(),
4
Loop condition is false. Execution continues on line 699
605 End = FuncInfo.ClrEHUnwindMap.rend();
606 Entry != End; ++Entry) {
607 const Instruction *Pad =
608 Entry->Handler.get<const BasicBlock *>()->getFirstNonPHI();
609 // For most pads, the TryParentState is the state associated with the
610 // unwind dest of exceptional exits from it.
611 const BasicBlock *UnwindDest;
612 if (const auto *Catch = dyn_cast<CatchPadInst>(Pad)) {
613 // If a catch is not the last in its catchswitch, its TryParentState is
614 // the state associated with the next catch in the switch, even though
615 // that's not the unwind dest of exceptions escaping the catch. Those
616 // cases were already assigned a TryParentState in the first pass, so
617 // skip them.
618 if (Entry->TryParentState != -1)
619 continue;
620 // Otherwise, get the unwind dest from the catchswitch.
621 UnwindDest = Catch->getCatchSwitch()->getUnwindDest();
622 } else {
623 const auto *Cleanup = cast<CleanupPadInst>(Pad);
624 UnwindDest = nullptr;
625 for (const User *U : Cleanup->users()) {
626 if (auto *CleanupRet = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(U)) {
627 // Common and unambiguous case -- cleanupret indicates cleanup's
628 // unwind dest.
629 UnwindDest = CleanupRet->getUnwindDest();
630 break;
631 }
632
633 // Get an unwind dest for the user
634 const BasicBlock *UserUnwindDest = nullptr;
635 if (auto *Invoke = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(U)) {
636 UserUnwindDest = Invoke->getUnwindDest();
637 } else if (auto *CatchSwitch = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(U)) {
638 UserUnwindDest = CatchSwitch->getUnwindDest();
639 } else if (auto *ChildCleanup = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(U)) {
640 int UserState = FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[ChildCleanup];
641 int UserUnwindState =
642 FuncInfo.ClrEHUnwindMap[UserState].TryParentState;
643 if (UserUnwindState != -1)
644 UserUnwindDest = FuncInfo.ClrEHUnwindMap[UserUnwindState]
645 .Handler.get<const BasicBlock *>();
646 }
647
648 // Not having an unwind dest for this user might indicate that it
649 // doesn't unwind, so can't be taken as proof that the cleanup itself
650 // may unwind to caller (see e.g. SimplifyUnreachable and
651 // RemoveUnwindEdge).
652 if (!UserUnwindDest)
653 continue;
654
655 // Now we have an unwind dest for the user, but we need to see if it
656 // unwinds all the way out of the cleanup or if it stays within it.
657 const Instruction *UserUnwindPad = UserUnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI();
658 const Value *UserUnwindParent;
659 if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(UserUnwindPad))
660 UserUnwindParent = CSI->getParentPad();
661 else
662 UserUnwindParent =
663 cast<CleanupPadInst>(UserUnwindPad)->getParentPad();
664
665 // The unwind stays within the cleanup iff it targets a child of the
666 // cleanup.
667 if (UserUnwindParent == Cleanup)
668 continue;
669
670 // This unwind exits the cleanup, so its dest is the cleanup's dest.
671 UnwindDest = UserUnwindDest;
672 break;
673 }
674 }
675
676 // Record the state of the unwind dest as the TryParentState.
677 int UnwindDestState;
678
679 // If UnwindDest is null at this point, either the pad in question can
680 // be exited by unwind to caller, or it cannot be exited by unwind. In
681 // either case, reporting such cases as unwinding to caller is correct.
682 // This can lead to EH tables that "look strange" -- if this pad's is in
683 // a parent funclet which has other children that do unwind to an enclosing
684 // pad, the try region for this pad will be missing the "duplicate" EH
685 // clause entries that you'd expect to see covering the whole parent. That
686 // should be benign, since the unwind never actually happens. If it were
687 // an issue, we could add a subsequent pass that pushes unwind dests down
688 // from parents that have them to children that appear to unwind to caller.
689 if (!UnwindDest) {
690 UnwindDestState = -1;
691 } else {
692 UnwindDestState = FuncInfo.EHPadStateMap[UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI()];
693 }
694
695 Entry->TryParentState = UnwindDestState;
696 }
697
698 // Step three: transfer information from pads to invokes.
699 calculateStateNumbersForInvokes(Fn, FuncInfo);
5
Calling 'calculateStateNumbersForInvokes'
700}
701
702void WinEHPrepare::colorFunclets(Function &F) {
703 BlockColors = colorEHFunclets(F);
704
705 // Invert the map from BB to colors to color to BBs.
706 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
707 ColorVector &Colors = BlockColors[&BB];
708 for (BasicBlock *Color : Colors)
709 FuncletBlocks[Color].push_back(&BB);
710 }
711}
712
713void WinEHPrepare::demotePHIsOnFunclets(Function &F,
714 bool DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnly) {
715 // Strip PHI nodes off of EH pads.
716 SmallVector<PHINode *, 16> PHINodes;
717 for (BasicBlock &BB : make_early_inc_range(F)) {
718 if (!BB.isEHPad())
719 continue;
720 if (DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnly && !isa<CatchSwitchInst>(BB.getFirstNonPHI()))
721 continue;
722
723 for (Instruction &I : make_early_inc_range(BB)) {
724 auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(&I);
725 // Stop at the first non-PHI.
726 if (!PN)
727 break;
728
729 AllocaInst *SpillSlot = insertPHILoads(PN, F);
730 if (SpillSlot)
731 insertPHIStores(PN, SpillSlot);
732
733 PHINodes.push_back(PN);
734 }
735 }
736
737 for (auto *PN : PHINodes) {
738 // There may be lingering uses on other EH PHIs being removed
739 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(PN->getType()));
740 PN->eraseFromParent();
741 }
742}
743
744void WinEHPrepare::cloneCommonBlocks(Function &F) {
745 // We need to clone all blocks which belong to multiple funclets. Values are
746 // remapped throughout the funclet to propagate both the new instructions
747 // *and* the new basic blocks themselves.
748 for (auto &Funclets : FuncletBlocks) {
749 BasicBlock *FuncletPadBB = Funclets.first;
750 std::vector<BasicBlock *> &BlocksInFunclet = Funclets.second;
751 Value *FuncletToken;
752 if (FuncletPadBB == &F.getEntryBlock())
753 FuncletToken = ConstantTokenNone::get(F.getContext());
754 else
755 FuncletToken = FuncletPadBB->getFirstNonPHI();
756
757 std::vector<std::pair<BasicBlock *, BasicBlock *>> Orig2Clone;
758 ValueToValueMapTy VMap;
759 for (BasicBlock *BB : BlocksInFunclet) {
760 ColorVector &ColorsForBB = BlockColors[BB];
761 // We don't need to do anything if the block is monochromatic.
762 size_t NumColorsForBB = ColorsForBB.size();
763 if (NumColorsForBB == 1)
764 continue;
765
766 DEBUG_WITH_TYPE("winehprepare-coloring",do { } while (false)
767 dbgs() << " Cloning block \'" << BB->getName()do { } while (false)
768 << "\' for funclet \'" << FuncletPadBB->getName()do { } while (false)
769 << "\'.\n")do { } while (false);
770
771 // Create a new basic block and copy instructions into it!
772 BasicBlock *CBB =
773 CloneBasicBlock(BB, VMap, Twine(".for.", FuncletPadBB->getName()));
774 // Insert the clone immediately after the original to ensure determinism
775 // and to keep the same relative ordering of any funclet's blocks.
776 CBB->insertInto(&F, BB->getNextNode());
777
778 // Add basic block mapping.
779 VMap[BB] = CBB;
780
781 // Record delta operations that we need to perform to our color mappings.
782 Orig2Clone.emplace_back(BB, CBB);
783 }
784
785 // If nothing was cloned, we're done cloning in this funclet.
786 if (Orig2Clone.empty())
787 continue;
788
789 // Update our color mappings to reflect that one block has lost a color and
790 // another has gained a color.
791 for (auto &BBMapping : Orig2Clone) {
792 BasicBlock *OldBlock = BBMapping.first;
793 BasicBlock *NewBlock = BBMapping.second;
794
795 BlocksInFunclet.push_back(NewBlock);
796 ColorVector &NewColors = BlockColors[NewBlock];
797 assert(NewColors.empty() && "A new block should only have one color!")((void)0);
798 NewColors.push_back(FuncletPadBB);
799
800 DEBUG_WITH_TYPE("winehprepare-coloring",do { } while (false)
801 dbgs() << " Assigned color \'" << FuncletPadBB->getName()do { } while (false)
802 << "\' to block \'" << NewBlock->getName()do { } while (false)
803 << "\'.\n")do { } while (false);
804
805 llvm::erase_value(BlocksInFunclet, OldBlock);
806 ColorVector &OldColors = BlockColors[OldBlock];
807 llvm::erase_value(OldColors, FuncletPadBB);
808
809 DEBUG_WITH_TYPE("winehprepare-coloring",do { } while (false)
810 dbgs() << " Removed color \'" << FuncletPadBB->getName()do { } while (false)
811 << "\' from block \'" << OldBlock->getName()do { } while (false)
812 << "\'.\n")do { } while (false);
813 }
814
815 // Loop over all of the instructions in this funclet, fixing up operand
816 // references as we go. This uses VMap to do all the hard work.
817 for (BasicBlock *BB : BlocksInFunclet)
818 // Loop over all instructions, fixing each one as we find it...
819 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
820 RemapInstruction(&I, VMap,
821 RF_IgnoreMissingLocals | RF_NoModuleLevelChanges);
822
823 // Catchrets targeting cloned blocks need to be updated separately from
824 // the loop above because they are not in the current funclet.
825 SmallVector<CatchReturnInst *, 2> FixupCatchrets;
826 for (auto &BBMapping : Orig2Clone) {
827 BasicBlock *OldBlock = BBMapping.first;
828 BasicBlock *NewBlock = BBMapping.second;
829
830 FixupCatchrets.clear();
831 for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(OldBlock))
832 if (auto *CatchRet = dyn_cast<CatchReturnInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
833 if (CatchRet->getCatchSwitchParentPad() == FuncletToken)
834 FixupCatchrets.push_back(CatchRet);
835
836 for (CatchReturnInst *CatchRet : FixupCatchrets)
837 CatchRet->setSuccessor(NewBlock);
838 }
839
840 auto UpdatePHIOnClonedBlock = [&](PHINode *PN, bool IsForOldBlock) {
841 unsigned NumPreds = PN->getNumIncomingValues();
842 for (unsigned PredIdx = 0, PredEnd = NumPreds; PredIdx != PredEnd;
843 ++PredIdx) {
844 BasicBlock *IncomingBlock = PN->getIncomingBlock(PredIdx);
845 bool EdgeTargetsFunclet;
846 if (auto *CRI =
847 dyn_cast<CatchReturnInst>(IncomingBlock->getTerminator())) {
848 EdgeTargetsFunclet = (CRI->getCatchSwitchParentPad() == FuncletToken);
849 } else {
850 ColorVector &IncomingColors = BlockColors[IncomingBlock];
851 assert(!IncomingColors.empty() && "Block not colored!")((void)0);
852 assert((IncomingColors.size() == 1 ||((void)0)
853 llvm::all_of(IncomingColors,((void)0)
854 [&](BasicBlock *Color) {((void)0)
855 return Color != FuncletPadBB;((void)0)
856 })) &&((void)0)
857 "Cloning should leave this funclet's blocks monochromatic")((void)0);
858 EdgeTargetsFunclet = (IncomingColors.front() == FuncletPadBB);
859 }
860 if (IsForOldBlock != EdgeTargetsFunclet)
861 continue;
862 PN->removeIncomingValue(IncomingBlock, /*DeletePHIIfEmpty=*/false);
863 // Revisit the next entry.
864 --PredIdx;
865 --PredEnd;
866 }
867 };
868
869 for (auto &BBMapping : Orig2Clone) {
870 BasicBlock *OldBlock = BBMapping.first;
871 BasicBlock *NewBlock = BBMapping.second;
872 for (PHINode &OldPN : OldBlock->phis()) {
873 UpdatePHIOnClonedBlock(&OldPN, /*IsForOldBlock=*/true);
874 }
875 for (PHINode &NewPN : NewBlock->phis()) {
876 UpdatePHIOnClonedBlock(&NewPN, /*IsForOldBlock=*/false);
877 }
878 }
879
880 // Check to see if SuccBB has PHI nodes. If so, we need to add entries to
881 // the PHI nodes for NewBB now.
882 for (auto &BBMapping : Orig2Clone) {
883 BasicBlock *OldBlock = BBMapping.first;
884 BasicBlock *NewBlock = BBMapping.second;
885 for (BasicBlock *SuccBB : successors(NewBlock)) {
886 for (PHINode &SuccPN : SuccBB->phis()) {
887 // Ok, we have a PHI node. Figure out what the incoming value was for
888 // the OldBlock.
889 int OldBlockIdx = SuccPN.getBasicBlockIndex(OldBlock);
890 if (OldBlockIdx == -1)
891 break;
892 Value *IV = SuccPN.getIncomingValue(OldBlockIdx);
893
894 // Remap the value if necessary.
895 if (auto *Inst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IV)) {
896 ValueToValueMapTy::iterator I = VMap.find(Inst);
897 if (I != VMap.end())
898 IV = I->second;
899 }
900
901 SuccPN.addIncoming(IV, NewBlock);
902 }
903 }
904 }
905
906 for (ValueToValueMapTy::value_type VT : VMap) {
907 // If there were values defined in BB that are used outside the funclet,
908 // then we now have to update all uses of the value to use either the
909 // original value, the cloned value, or some PHI derived value. This can
910 // require arbitrary PHI insertion, of which we are prepared to do, clean
911 // these up now.
912 SmallVector<Use *, 16> UsesToRename;
913
914 auto *OldI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(const_cast<Value *>(VT.first));
915 if (!OldI)
916 continue;
917 auto *NewI = cast<Instruction>(VT.second);
918 // Scan all uses of this instruction to see if it is used outside of its
919 // funclet, and if so, record them in UsesToRename.
920 for (Use &U : OldI->uses()) {
921 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
922 BasicBlock *UserBB = UserI->getParent();
923 ColorVector &ColorsForUserBB = BlockColors[UserBB];
924 assert(!ColorsForUserBB.empty())((void)0);
925 if (ColorsForUserBB.size() > 1 ||
926 *ColorsForUserBB.begin() != FuncletPadBB)
927 UsesToRename.push_back(&U);
928 }
929
930 // If there are no uses outside the block, we're done with this
931 // instruction.
932 if (UsesToRename.empty())
933 continue;
934
935 // We found a use of OldI outside of the funclet. Rename all uses of OldI
936 // that are outside its funclet to be uses of the appropriate PHI node
937 // etc.
938 SSAUpdater SSAUpdate;
939 SSAUpdate.Initialize(OldI->getType(), OldI->getName());
940 SSAUpdate.AddAvailableValue(OldI->getParent(), OldI);
941 SSAUpdate.AddAvailableValue(NewI->getParent(), NewI);
942
943 while (!UsesToRename.empty())
944 SSAUpdate.RewriteUseAfterInsertions(*UsesToRename.pop_back_val());
945 }
946 }
947}
948
949void WinEHPrepare::removeImplausibleInstructions(Function &F) {
950 // Remove implausible terminators and replace them with UnreachableInst.
951 for (auto &Funclet : FuncletBlocks) {
952 BasicBlock *FuncletPadBB = Funclet.first;
953 std::vector<BasicBlock *> &BlocksInFunclet = Funclet.second;
954 Instruction *FirstNonPHI = FuncletPadBB->getFirstNonPHI();
955 auto *FuncletPad = dyn_cast<FuncletPadInst>(FirstNonPHI);
956 auto *CatchPad = dyn_cast_or_null<CatchPadInst>(FuncletPad);
957 auto *CleanupPad = dyn_cast_or_null<CleanupPadInst>(FuncletPad);
958
959 for (BasicBlock *BB : BlocksInFunclet) {
960 for (Instruction &I : *BB) {
961 auto *CB = dyn_cast<CallBase>(&I);
962 if (!CB)
963 continue;
964
965 Value *FuncletBundleOperand = nullptr;
966 if (auto BU = CB->getOperandBundle(LLVMContext::OB_funclet))
967 FuncletBundleOperand = BU->Inputs.front();
968
969 if (FuncletBundleOperand == FuncletPad)
970 continue;
971
972 // Skip call sites which are nounwind intrinsics or inline asm.
973 auto *CalledFn =
974 dyn_cast<Function>(CB->getCalledOperand()->stripPointerCasts());
975 if (CalledFn && ((CalledFn->isIntrinsic() && CB->doesNotThrow()) ||
976 CB->isInlineAsm()))
977 continue;
978
979 // This call site was not part of this funclet, remove it.
980 if (isa<InvokeInst>(CB)) {
981 // Remove the unwind edge if it was an invoke.
982 removeUnwindEdge(BB);
983 // Get a pointer to the new call.
984 BasicBlock::iterator CallI =
985 std::prev(BB->getTerminator()->getIterator());
986 auto *CI = cast<CallInst>(&*CallI);
987 changeToUnreachable(CI);
988 } else {
989 changeToUnreachable(&I);
990 }
991
992 // There are no more instructions in the block (except for unreachable),
993 // we are done.
994 break;
995 }
996
997 Instruction *TI = BB->getTerminator();
998 // CatchPadInst and CleanupPadInst can't transfer control to a ReturnInst.
999 bool IsUnreachableRet = isa<ReturnInst>(TI) && FuncletPad;
1000 // The token consumed by a CatchReturnInst must match the funclet token.
1001 bool IsUnreachableCatchret = false;
1002 if (auto *CRI = dyn_cast<CatchReturnInst>(TI))
1003 IsUnreachableCatchret = CRI->getCatchPad() != CatchPad;
1004 // The token consumed by a CleanupReturnInst must match the funclet token.
1005 bool IsUnreachableCleanupret = false;
1006 if (auto *CRI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(TI))
1007 IsUnreachableCleanupret = CRI->getCleanupPad() != CleanupPad;
1008 if (IsUnreachableRet || IsUnreachableCatchret ||
1009 IsUnreachableCleanupret) {
1010 changeToUnreachable(TI);
1011 } else if (isa<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
1012 if (Personality == EHPersonality::MSVC_CXX && CleanupPad) {
1013 // Invokes within a cleanuppad for the MSVC++ personality never
1014 // transfer control to their unwind edge: the personality will
1015 // terminate the program.
1016 removeUnwindEdge(BB);
1017 }
1018 }
1019 }
1020 }
1021}
1022
1023void WinEHPrepare::cleanupPreparedFunclets(Function &F) {
1024 // Clean-up some of the mess we made by removing useles PHI nodes, trivial
1025 // branches, etc.
1026 for (BasicBlock &BB : llvm::make_early_inc_range(F)) {
1027 SimplifyInstructionsInBlock(&BB);
1028 ConstantFoldTerminator(&BB, /*DeleteDeadConditions=*/true);
1029 MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(&BB);
1030 }
1031
1032 // We might have some unreachable blocks after cleaning up some impossible
1033 // control flow.
1034 removeUnreachableBlocks(F);
1035}
1036
1037#ifndef NDEBUG1
1038void WinEHPrepare::verifyPreparedFunclets(Function &F) {
1039 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
1040 size_t NumColors = BlockColors[&BB].size();
1041 assert(NumColors == 1 && "Expected monochromatic BB!")((void)0);
1042 if (NumColors == 0)
1043 report_fatal_error("Uncolored BB!");
1044 if (NumColors > 1)
1045 report_fatal_error("Multicolor BB!");
1046 assert((DisableDemotion || !(BB.isEHPad() && isa<PHINode>(BB.begin()))) &&((void)0)
1047 "EH Pad still has a PHI!")((void)0);
1048 }
1049}
1050#endif
1051
1052bool WinEHPrepare::prepareExplicitEH(Function &F) {
1053 // Remove unreachable blocks. It is not valuable to assign them a color and
1054 // their existence can trick us into thinking values are alive when they are
1055 // not.
1056 removeUnreachableBlocks(F);
1057
1058 // Determine which blocks are reachable from which funclet entries.
1059 colorFunclets(F);
1060
1061 cloneCommonBlocks(F);
1062
1063 if (!DisableDemotion)
1064 demotePHIsOnFunclets(F, DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnly ||
1065 DemoteCatchSwitchPHIOnlyOpt);
1066
1067 if (!DisableCleanups) {
1068 assert(!verifyFunction(F, &dbgs()))((void)0);
1069 removeImplausibleInstructions(F);
1070
1071 assert(!verifyFunction(F, &dbgs()))((void)0);
1072 cleanupPreparedFunclets(F);
1073 }
1074
1075 LLVM_DEBUG(verifyPreparedFunclets(F))do { } while (false);
1076 // Recolor the CFG to verify that all is well.
1077 LLVM_DEBUG(colorFunclets(F))do { } while (false);
1078 LLVM_DEBUG(verifyPreparedFunclets(F))do { } while (false);
1079
1080 BlockColors.clear();
1081 FuncletBlocks.clear();
1082
1083 return true;
1084}
1085
1086// TODO: Share loads when one use dominates another, or when a catchpad exit
1087// dominates uses (needs dominators).
1088AllocaInst *WinEHPrepare::insertPHILoads(PHINode *PN, Function &F) {
1089 BasicBlock *PHIBlock = PN->getParent();
1090 AllocaInst *SpillSlot = nullptr;
1091 Instruction *EHPad = PHIBlock->getFirstNonPHI();
1092
1093 if (!EHPad->isTerminator()) {
1094 // If the EHPad isn't a terminator, then we can insert a load in this block
1095 // that will dominate all uses.
1096 SpillSlot = new AllocaInst(PN->getType(), DL->getAllocaAddrSpace(), nullptr,
1097 Twine(PN->getName(), ".wineh.spillslot"),
1098 &F.getEntryBlock().front());
1099 Value *V = new LoadInst(PN->getType(), SpillSlot,
1100 Twine(PN->getName(), ".wineh.reload"),
1101 &*PHIBlock->getFirstInsertionPt());
1102 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
1103 return SpillSlot;
1104 }
1105
1106 // Otherwise, we have a PHI on a terminator EHPad, and we give up and insert
1107 // loads of the slot before every use.
1108 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, Value *> Loads;
1109 for (Use &U : llvm::make_early_inc_range(PN->uses())) {
1110 auto *UsingInst = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
1111 if (isa<PHINode>(UsingInst) && UsingInst->getParent()->isEHPad()) {
1112 // Use is on an EH pad phi. Leave it alone; we'll insert loads and
1113 // stores for it separately.
1114 continue;
1115 }
1116 replaceUseWithLoad(PN, U, SpillSlot, Loads, F);
1117 }
1118 return SpillSlot;
1119}
1120
1121// TODO: improve store placement. Inserting at def is probably good, but need
1122// to be careful not to introduce interfering stores (needs liveness analysis).
1123// TODO: identify related phi nodes that can share spill slots, and share them
1124// (also needs liveness).
1125void WinEHPrepare::insertPHIStores(PHINode *OriginalPHI,
1126 AllocaInst *SpillSlot) {
1127 // Use a worklist of (Block, Value) pairs -- the given Value needs to be
1128 // stored to the spill slot by the end of the given Block.
1129 SmallVector<std::pair<BasicBlock *, Value *>, 4> Worklist;
1130
1131 Worklist.push_back({OriginalPHI->getParent(), OriginalPHI});
1132
1133 while (!Worklist.empty()) {
1134 BasicBlock *EHBlock;
1135 Value *InVal;
1136 std::tie(EHBlock, InVal) = Worklist.pop_back_val();
1137
1138 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(InVal);
1139 if (PN && PN->getParent() == EHBlock) {
1140 // The value is defined by another PHI we need to remove, with no room to
1141 // insert a store after the PHI, so each predecessor needs to store its
1142 // incoming value.
1143 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i < e; ++i) {
1144 Value *PredVal = PN->getIncomingValue(i);
1145
1146 // Undef can safely be skipped.
1147 if (isa<UndefValue>(PredVal))
1148 continue;
1149
1150 insertPHIStore(PN->getIncomingBlock(i), PredVal, SpillSlot, Worklist);
1151 }
1152 } else {
1153 // We need to store InVal, which dominates EHBlock, but can't put a store
1154 // in EHBlock, so need to put stores in each predecessor.
1155 for (BasicBlock *PredBlock : predecessors(EHBlock)) {
1156 insertPHIStore(PredBlock, InVal, SpillSlot, Worklist);
1157 }
1158 }
1159 }
1160}
1161
1162void WinEHPrepare::insertPHIStore(
1163 BasicBlock *PredBlock, Value *PredVal, AllocaInst *SpillSlot,
1164 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<BasicBlock *, Value *>> &Worklist) {
1165
1166 if (PredBlock->isEHPad() && PredBlock->getFirstNonPHI()->isTerminator()) {
1167 // Pred is unsplittable, so we need to queue it on the worklist.
1168 Worklist.push_back({PredBlock, PredVal});
1169 return;
1170 }
1171
1172 // Otherwise, insert the store at the end of the basic block.
1173 new StoreInst(PredVal, SpillSlot, PredBlock->getTerminator());
1174}
1175
1176void WinEHPrepare::replaceUseWithLoad(Value *V, Use &U, AllocaInst *&SpillSlot,
1177 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, Value *> &Loads,
1178 Function &F) {
1179 // Lazilly create the spill slot.
1180 if (!SpillSlot)
1181 SpillSlot = new AllocaInst(V->getType(), DL->getAllocaAddrSpace(), nullptr,
1182 Twine(V->getName(), ".wineh.spillslot"),
1183 &F.getEntryBlock().front());
1184
1185 auto *UsingInst = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
1186 if (auto *UsingPHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UsingInst)) {
1187 // If this is a PHI node, we can't insert a load of the value before
1188 // the use. Instead insert the load in the predecessor block
1189 // corresponding to the incoming value.
1190 //
1191 // Note that if there are multiple edges from a basic block to this
1192 // PHI node that we cannot have multiple loads. The problem is that
1193 // the resulting PHI node will have multiple values (from each load)
1194 // coming in from the same block, which is illegal SSA form.
1195 // For this reason, we keep track of and reuse loads we insert.
1196 BasicBlock *IncomingBlock = UsingPHI->getIncomingBlock(U);
1197 if (auto *CatchRet =
1198 dyn_cast<CatchReturnInst>(IncomingBlock->getTerminator())) {
1199 // Putting a load above a catchret and use on the phi would still leave
1200 // a cross-funclet def/use. We need to split the edge, change the
1201 // catchret to target the new block, and put the load there.
1202 BasicBlock *PHIBlock = UsingInst->getParent();
1203 BasicBlock *NewBlock = SplitEdge(IncomingBlock, PHIBlock);
1204 // SplitEdge gives us:
1205 // IncomingBlock:
1206 // ...
1207 // br label %NewBlock
1208 // NewBlock:
1209 // catchret label %PHIBlock
1210 // But we need:
1211 // IncomingBlock:
1212 // ...
1213 // catchret label %NewBlock
1214 // NewBlock:
1215 // br label %PHIBlock
1216 // So move the terminators to each others' blocks and swap their
1217 // successors.
1218 BranchInst *Goto = cast<BranchInst>(IncomingBlock->getTerminator());
1219 Goto->removeFromParent();
1220 CatchRet->removeFromParent();
1221 IncomingBlock->getInstList().push_back(CatchRet);
1222 NewBlock->getInstList().push_back(Goto);
1223 Goto->setSuccessor(0, PHIBlock);
1224 CatchRet->setSuccessor(NewBlock);
1225 // Update the color mapping for the newly split edge.
1226 // Grab a reference to the ColorVector to be inserted before getting the
1227 // reference to the vector we are copying because inserting the new
1228 // element in BlockColors might cause the map to be reallocated.
1229 ColorVector &ColorsForNewBlock = BlockColors[NewBlock];
1230 ColorVector &ColorsForPHIBlock = BlockColors[PHIBlock];
1231 ColorsForNewBlock = ColorsForPHIBlock;
1232 for (BasicBlock *FuncletPad : ColorsForPHIBlock)
1233 FuncletBlocks[FuncletPad].push_back(NewBlock);
1234 // Treat the new block as incoming for load insertion.
1235 IncomingBlock = NewBlock;
1236 }
1237 Value *&Load = Loads[IncomingBlock];
1238 // Insert the load into the predecessor block
1239 if (!Load)
1240 Load = new LoadInst(V->getType(), SpillSlot,
1241 Twine(V->getName(), ".wineh.reload"),
1242 /*isVolatile=*/false, IncomingBlock->getTerminator());
1243
1244 U.set(Load);
1245 } else {
1246 // Reload right before the old use.
1247 auto *Load = new LoadInst(V->getType(), SpillSlot,
1248 Twine(V->getName(), ".wineh.reload"),
1249 /*isVolatile=*/false, UsingInst);
1250 U.set(Load);
1251 }
1252}
1253
1254void WinEHFuncInfo::addIPToStateRange(const InvokeInst *II,
1255 MCSymbol *InvokeBegin,
1256 MCSymbol *InvokeEnd) {
1257 assert(InvokeStateMap.count(II) &&((void)0)
1258 "should get invoke with precomputed state")((void)0);
1259 LabelToStateMap[InvokeBegin] = std::make_pair(InvokeStateMap[II], InvokeEnd);
1260}
1261
1262WinEHFuncInfo::WinEHFuncInfo() {}

/usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/IR/Instructions.h

1//===- llvm/Instructions.h - Instruction subclass definitions ---*- C++ -*-===//
2//
3// Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions.
4// See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information.
5// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception
6//
7//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
8//
9// This file exposes the class definitions of all of the subclasses of the
10// Instruction class. This is meant to be an easy way to get access to all
11// instruction subclasses.
12//
13//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
14
15#ifndef LLVM_IR_INSTRUCTIONS_H
16#define LLVM_IR_INSTRUCTIONS_H
17
18#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/Bitfields.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/MapVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/None.h"
22#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
23#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
24#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
25#include "llvm/ADT/Twine.h"
26#include "llvm/ADT/iterator.h"
27#include "llvm/ADT/iterator_range.h"
28#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/CallingConv.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/OperandTraits.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
39#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
40#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
41#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
42#include "llvm/Support/AtomicOrdering.h"
43#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
44#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
45#include <cassert>
46#include <cstddef>
47#include <cstdint>
48#include <iterator>
49
50namespace llvm {
51
52class APInt;
53class ConstantInt;
54class DataLayout;
55class LLVMContext;
56
57//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
58// AllocaInst Class
59//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
60
61/// an instruction to allocate memory on the stack
62class AllocaInst : public UnaryInstruction {
63 Type *AllocatedType;
64
65 using AlignmentField = AlignmentBitfieldElementT<0>;
66 using UsedWithInAllocaField = BoolBitfieldElementT<AlignmentField::NextBit>;
67 using SwiftErrorField = BoolBitfieldElementT<UsedWithInAllocaField::NextBit>;
68 static_assert(Bitfield::areContiguous<AlignmentField, UsedWithInAllocaField,
69 SwiftErrorField>(),
70 "Bitfields must be contiguous");
71
72protected:
73 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
74 friend class Instruction;
75
76 AllocaInst *cloneImpl() const;
77
78public:
79 explicit AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, Value *ArraySize,
80 const Twine &Name, Instruction *InsertBefore);
81 AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, Value *ArraySize,
82 const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
83
84 AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, const Twine &Name,
85 Instruction *InsertBefore);
86 AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace,
87 const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
88
89 AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, Value *ArraySize, Align Align,
90 const Twine &Name = "", Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
91 AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, Value *ArraySize, Align Align,
92 const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
93
94 /// Return true if there is an allocation size parameter to the allocation
95 /// instruction that is not 1.
96 bool isArrayAllocation() const;
97
98 /// Get the number of elements allocated. For a simple allocation of a single
99 /// element, this will return a constant 1 value.
100 const Value *getArraySize() const { return getOperand(0); }
101 Value *getArraySize() { return getOperand(0); }
102
103 /// Overload to return most specific pointer type.
104 PointerType *getType() const {
105 return cast<PointerType>(Instruction::getType());
106 }
107
108 /// Get allocation size in bits. Returns None if size can't be determined,
109 /// e.g. in case of a VLA.
110 Optional<TypeSize> getAllocationSizeInBits(const DataLayout &DL) const;
111
112 /// Return the type that is being allocated by the instruction.
113 Type *getAllocatedType() const { return AllocatedType; }
114 /// for use only in special circumstances that need to generically
115 /// transform a whole instruction (eg: IR linking and vectorization).
116 void setAllocatedType(Type *Ty) { AllocatedType = Ty; }
117
118 /// Return the alignment of the memory that is being allocated by the
119 /// instruction.
120 Align getAlign() const {
121 return Align(1ULL << getSubclassData<AlignmentField>());
122 }
123
124 void setAlignment(Align Align) {
125 setSubclassData<AlignmentField>(Log2(Align));
126 }
127
128 // FIXME: Remove this one transition to Align is over.
129 unsigned getAlignment() const { return getAlign().value(); }
130
131 /// Return true if this alloca is in the entry block of the function and is a
132 /// constant size. If so, the code generator will fold it into the
133 /// prolog/epilog code, so it is basically free.
134 bool isStaticAlloca() const;
135
136 /// Return true if this alloca is used as an inalloca argument to a call. Such
137 /// allocas are never considered static even if they are in the entry block.
138 bool isUsedWithInAlloca() const {
139 return getSubclassData<UsedWithInAllocaField>();
140 }
141
142 /// Specify whether this alloca is used to represent the arguments to a call.
143 void setUsedWithInAlloca(bool V) {
144 setSubclassData<UsedWithInAllocaField>(V);
145 }
146
147 /// Return true if this alloca is used as a swifterror argument to a call.
148 bool isSwiftError() const { return getSubclassData<SwiftErrorField>(); }
149 /// Specify whether this alloca is used to represent a swifterror.
150 void setSwiftError(bool V) { setSubclassData<SwiftErrorField>(V); }
151
152 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
153 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
154 return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Alloca);
155 }
156 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
157 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
158 }
159
160private:
161 // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding
162 // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
163 template <typename Bitfield>
164 void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) {
165 Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value);
166 }
167};
168
169//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
170// LoadInst Class
171//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
172
173/// An instruction for reading from memory. This uses the SubclassData field in
174/// Value to store whether or not the load is volatile.
175class LoadInst : public UnaryInstruction {
176 using VolatileField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>;
177 using AlignmentField = AlignmentBitfieldElementT<VolatileField::NextBit>;
178 using OrderingField = AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<AlignmentField::NextBit>;
179 static_assert(
180 Bitfield::areContiguous<VolatileField, AlignmentField, OrderingField>(),
181 "Bitfields must be contiguous");
182
183 void AssertOK();
184
185protected:
186 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
187 friend class Instruction;
188
189 LoadInst *cloneImpl() const;
190
191public:
192 LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr,
193 Instruction *InsertBefore);
194 LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
195 LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile,
196 Instruction *InsertBefore);
197 LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile,
198 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
199 LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile,
200 Align Align, Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
201 LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile,
202 Align Align, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
203 LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile,
204 Align Align, AtomicOrdering Order,
205 SyncScope::ID SSID = SyncScope::System,
206 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
207 LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile,
208 Align Align, AtomicOrdering Order, SyncScope::ID SSID,
209 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
210
211 /// Return true if this is a load from a volatile memory location.
212 bool isVolatile() const { return getSubclassData<VolatileField>(); }
213
214 /// Specify whether this is a volatile load or not.
215 void setVolatile(bool V) { setSubclassData<VolatileField>(V); }
216
217 /// Return the alignment of the access that is being performed.
218 /// FIXME: Remove this function once transition to Align is over.
219 /// Use getAlign() instead.
220 unsigned getAlignment() const { return getAlign().value(); }
221
222 /// Return the alignment of the access that is being performed.
223 Align getAlign() const {
224 return Align(1ULL << (getSubclassData<AlignmentField>()));
225 }
226
227 void setAlignment(Align Align) {
228 setSubclassData<AlignmentField>(Log2(Align));
229 }
230
231 /// Returns the ordering constraint of this load instruction.
232 AtomicOrdering getOrdering() const {
233 return getSubclassData<OrderingField>();
234 }
235 /// Sets the ordering constraint of this load instruction. May not be Release
236 /// or AcquireRelease.
237 void setOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) {
238 setSubclassData<OrderingField>(Ordering);
239 }
240
241 /// Returns the synchronization scope ID of this load instruction.
242 SyncScope::ID getSyncScopeID() const {
243 return SSID;
244 }
245
246 /// Sets the synchronization scope ID of this load instruction.
247 void setSyncScopeID(SyncScope::ID SSID) {
248 this->SSID = SSID;
249 }
250
251 /// Sets the ordering constraint and the synchronization scope ID of this load
252 /// instruction.
253 void setAtomic(AtomicOrdering Ordering,
254 SyncScope::ID SSID = SyncScope::System) {
255 setOrdering(Ordering);
256 setSyncScopeID(SSID);
257 }
258
259 bool isSimple() const { return !isAtomic() && !isVolatile(); }
260
261 bool isUnordered() const {
262 return (getOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::NotAtomic ||
263 getOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::Unordered) &&
264 !isVolatile();
265 }
266
267 Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(0); }
268 const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(0); }
269 static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 0U; }
270 Type *getPointerOperandType() const { return getPointerOperand()->getType(); }
271
272 /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand.
273 unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const {
274 return getPointerOperandType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
275 }
276
277 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
278 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
279 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Load;
280 }
281 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
282 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
283 }
284
285private:
286 // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding
287 // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
288 template <typename Bitfield>
289 void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) {
290 Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value);
291 }
292
293 /// The synchronization scope ID of this load instruction. Not quite enough
294 /// room in SubClassData for everything, so synchronization scope ID gets its
295 /// own field.
296 SyncScope::ID SSID;
297};
298
299//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
300// StoreInst Class
301//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
302
303/// An instruction for storing to memory.
304class StoreInst : public Instruction {
305 using VolatileField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>;
306 using AlignmentField = AlignmentBitfieldElementT<VolatileField::NextBit>;
307 using OrderingField = AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<AlignmentField::NextBit>;
308 static_assert(
309 Bitfield::areContiguous<VolatileField, AlignmentField, OrderingField>(),
310 "Bitfields must be contiguous");
311
312 void AssertOK();
313
314protected:
315 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
316 friend class Instruction;
317
318 StoreInst *cloneImpl() const;
319
320public:
321 StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, Instruction *InsertBefore);
322 StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
323 StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, Instruction *InsertBefore);
324 StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
325 StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, Align Align,
326 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
327 StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, Align Align,
328 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
329 StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, Align Align,
330 AtomicOrdering Order, SyncScope::ID SSID = SyncScope::System,
331 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
332 StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, Align Align,
333 AtomicOrdering Order, SyncScope::ID SSID, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
334
335 // allocate space for exactly two operands
336 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 2); }
337 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); }
338
339 /// Return true if this is a store to a volatile memory location.
340 bool isVolatile() const { return getSubclassData<VolatileField>(); }
341
342 /// Specify whether this is a volatile store or not.
343 void setVolatile(bool V) { setSubclassData<VolatileField>(V); }
344
345 /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
346 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
347
348 /// Return the alignment of the access that is being performed
349 /// FIXME: Remove this function once transition to Align is over.
350 /// Use getAlign() instead.
351 unsigned getAlignment() const { return getAlign().value(); }
352
353 Align getAlign() const {
354 return Align(1ULL << (getSubclassData<AlignmentField>()));
355 }
356
357 void setAlignment(Align Align) {
358 setSubclassData<AlignmentField>(Log2(Align));
359 }
360
361 /// Returns the ordering constraint of this store instruction.
362 AtomicOrdering getOrdering() const {
363 return getSubclassData<OrderingField>();
364 }
365
366 /// Sets the ordering constraint of this store instruction. May not be
367 /// Acquire or AcquireRelease.
368 void setOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) {
369 setSubclassData<OrderingField>(Ordering);
370 }
371
372 /// Returns the synchronization scope ID of this store instruction.
373 SyncScope::ID getSyncScopeID() const {
374 return SSID;
375 }
376
377 /// Sets the synchronization scope ID of this store instruction.
378 void setSyncScopeID(SyncScope::ID SSID) {
379 this->SSID = SSID;
380 }
381
382 /// Sets the ordering constraint and the synchronization scope ID of this
383 /// store instruction.
384 void setAtomic(AtomicOrdering Ordering,
385 SyncScope::ID SSID = SyncScope::System) {
386 setOrdering(Ordering);
387 setSyncScopeID(SSID);
388 }
389
390 bool isSimple() const { return !isAtomic() && !isVolatile(); }
391
392 bool isUnordered() const {
393 return (getOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::NotAtomic ||
394 getOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::Unordered) &&
395 !isVolatile();
396 }
397
398 Value *getValueOperand() { return getOperand(0); }
399 const Value *getValueOperand() const { return getOperand(0); }
400
401 Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(1); }
402 const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(1); }
403 static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 1U; }
404 Type *getPointerOperandType() const { return getPointerOperand()->getType(); }
405
406 /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand.
407 unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const {
408 return getPointerOperandType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
409 }
410
411 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
412 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
413 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Store;
414 }
415 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
416 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
417 }
418
419private:
420 // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding
421 // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
422 template <typename Bitfield>
423 void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) {
424 Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value);
425 }
426
427 /// The synchronization scope ID of this store instruction. Not quite enough
428 /// room in SubClassData for everything, so synchronization scope ID gets its
429 /// own field.
430 SyncScope::ID SSID;
431};
432
433template <>
434struct OperandTraits<StoreInst> : public FixedNumOperandTraits<StoreInst, 2> {
435};
436
437DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(StoreInst, Value)StoreInst::op_iterator StoreInst::op_begin() { return OperandTraits
<StoreInst>::op_begin(this); } StoreInst::const_op_iterator
StoreInst::op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<StoreInst
>::op_begin(const_cast<StoreInst*>(this)); } StoreInst
::op_iterator StoreInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits<StoreInst
>::op_end(this); } StoreInst::const_op_iterator StoreInst::
op_end() const { return OperandTraits<StoreInst>::op_end
(const_cast<StoreInst*>(this)); } Value *StoreInst::getOperand
(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<StoreInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<StoreInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void StoreInst
::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture) { ((
void)0); OperandTraits<StoreInst>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture
] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned StoreInst::getNumOperands() const
{ return OperandTraits<StoreInst>::operands(this); } template
<int Idx_nocapture> Use &StoreInst::Op() { return this
->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture
> const Use &StoreInst::Op() const { return this->OpFrom
<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
438
439//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
440// FenceInst Class
441//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
442
443/// An instruction for ordering other memory operations.
444class FenceInst : public Instruction {
445 using OrderingField = AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<0>;
446
447 void Init(AtomicOrdering Ordering, SyncScope::ID SSID);
448
449protected:
450 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
451 friend class Instruction;
452
453 FenceInst *cloneImpl() const;
454
455public:
456 // Ordering may only be Acquire, Release, AcquireRelease, or
457 // SequentiallyConsistent.
458 FenceInst(LLVMContext &C, AtomicOrdering Ordering,
459 SyncScope::ID SSID = SyncScope::System,
460 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
461 FenceInst(LLVMContext &C, AtomicOrdering Ordering, SyncScope::ID SSID,
462 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
463
464 // allocate space for exactly zero operands
465 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 0); }
466 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); }
467
468 /// Returns the ordering constraint of this fence instruction.
469 AtomicOrdering getOrdering() const {
470 return getSubclassData<OrderingField>();
471 }
472
473 /// Sets the ordering constraint of this fence instruction. May only be
474 /// Acquire, Release, AcquireRelease, or SequentiallyConsistent.
475 void setOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) {
476 setSubclassData<OrderingField>(Ordering);
477 }
478
479 /// Returns the synchronization scope ID of this fence instruction.
480 SyncScope::ID getSyncScopeID() const {
481 return SSID;
482 }
483
484 /// Sets the synchronization scope ID of this fence instruction.
485 void setSyncScopeID(SyncScope::ID SSID) {
486 this->SSID = SSID;
487 }
488
489 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
490 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
491 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Fence;
492 }
493 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
494 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
495 }
496
497private:
498 // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding
499 // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
500 template <typename Bitfield>
501 void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) {
502 Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value);
503 }
504
505 /// The synchronization scope ID of this fence instruction. Not quite enough
506 /// room in SubClassData for everything, so synchronization scope ID gets its
507 /// own field.
508 SyncScope::ID SSID;
509};
510
511//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
512// AtomicCmpXchgInst Class
513//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
514
515/// An instruction that atomically checks whether a
516/// specified value is in a memory location, and, if it is, stores a new value
517/// there. The value returned by this instruction is a pair containing the
518/// original value as first element, and an i1 indicating success (true) or
519/// failure (false) as second element.
520///
521class AtomicCmpXchgInst : public Instruction {
522 void Init(Value *Ptr, Value *Cmp, Value *NewVal, Align Align,
523 AtomicOrdering SuccessOrdering, AtomicOrdering FailureOrdering,
524 SyncScope::ID SSID);
525
526 template <unsigned Offset>
527 using AtomicOrderingBitfieldElement =
528 typename Bitfield::Element<AtomicOrdering, Offset, 3,
529 AtomicOrdering::LAST>;
530
531protected:
532 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
533 friend class Instruction;
534
535 AtomicCmpXchgInst *cloneImpl() const;
536
537public:
538 AtomicCmpXchgInst(Value *Ptr, Value *Cmp, Value *NewVal, Align Alignment,
539 AtomicOrdering SuccessOrdering,
540 AtomicOrdering FailureOrdering, SyncScope::ID SSID,
541 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
542 AtomicCmpXchgInst(Value *Ptr, Value *Cmp, Value *NewVal, Align Alignment,
543 AtomicOrdering SuccessOrdering,
544 AtomicOrdering FailureOrdering, SyncScope::ID SSID,
545 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
546
547 // allocate space for exactly three operands
548 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 3); }
549 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); }
550
551 using VolatileField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>;
552 using WeakField = BoolBitfieldElementT<VolatileField::NextBit>;
553 using SuccessOrderingField =
554 AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<WeakField::NextBit>;
555 using FailureOrderingField =
556 AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<SuccessOrderingField::NextBit>;
557 using AlignmentField =
558 AlignmentBitfieldElementT<FailureOrderingField::NextBit>;
559 static_assert(
560 Bitfield::areContiguous<VolatileField, WeakField, SuccessOrderingField,
561 FailureOrderingField, AlignmentField>(),
562 "Bitfields must be contiguous");
563
564 /// Return the alignment of the memory that is being allocated by the
565 /// instruction.
566 Align getAlign() const {
567 return Align(1ULL << getSubclassData<AlignmentField>());
568 }
569
570 void setAlignment(Align Align) {
571 setSubclassData<AlignmentField>(Log2(Align));
572 }
573
574 /// Return true if this is a cmpxchg from a volatile memory
575 /// location.
576 ///
577 bool isVolatile() const { return getSubclassData<VolatileField>(); }
578
579 /// Specify whether this is a volatile cmpxchg.
580 ///
581 void setVolatile(bool V) { setSubclassData<VolatileField>(V); }
582
583 /// Return true if this cmpxchg may spuriously fail.
584 bool isWeak() const { return getSubclassData<WeakField>(); }
585
586 void setWeak(bool IsWeak) { setSubclassData<WeakField>(IsWeak); }
587
588 /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
589 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
590
591 static bool isValidSuccessOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) {
592 return Ordering != AtomicOrdering::NotAtomic &&
593 Ordering != AtomicOrdering::Unordered;
594 }
595
596 static bool isValidFailureOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) {
597 return Ordering != AtomicOrdering::NotAtomic &&
598 Ordering != AtomicOrdering::Unordered &&
599 Ordering != AtomicOrdering::AcquireRelease &&
600 Ordering != AtomicOrdering::Release;
601 }
602
603 /// Returns the success ordering constraint of this cmpxchg instruction.
604 AtomicOrdering getSuccessOrdering() const {
605 return getSubclassData<SuccessOrderingField>();
606 }
607
608 /// Sets the success ordering constraint of this cmpxchg instruction.
609 void setSuccessOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) {
610 assert(isValidSuccessOrdering(Ordering) &&((void)0)
611 "invalid CmpXchg success ordering")((void)0);
612 setSubclassData<SuccessOrderingField>(Ordering);
613 }
614
615 /// Returns the failure ordering constraint of this cmpxchg instruction.
616 AtomicOrdering getFailureOrdering() const {
617 return getSubclassData<FailureOrderingField>();
618 }
619
620 /// Sets the failure ordering constraint of this cmpxchg instruction.
621 void setFailureOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) {
622 assert(isValidFailureOrdering(Ordering) &&((void)0)
623 "invalid CmpXchg failure ordering")((void)0);
624 setSubclassData<FailureOrderingField>(Ordering);
625 }
626
627 /// Returns a single ordering which is at least as strong as both the
628 /// success and failure orderings for this cmpxchg.
629 AtomicOrdering getMergedOrdering() const {
630 if (getFailureOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::SequentiallyConsistent)
631 return AtomicOrdering::SequentiallyConsistent;
632 if (getFailureOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::Acquire) {
633 if (getSuccessOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::Monotonic)
634 return AtomicOrdering::Acquire;
635 if (getSuccessOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::Release)
636 return AtomicOrdering::AcquireRelease;
637 }
638 return getSuccessOrdering();
639 }
640
641 /// Returns the synchronization scope ID of this cmpxchg instruction.
642 SyncScope::ID getSyncScopeID() const {
643 return SSID;
644 }
645
646 /// Sets the synchronization scope ID of this cmpxchg instruction.
647 void setSyncScopeID(SyncScope::ID SSID) {
648 this->SSID = SSID;
649 }
650
651 Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(0); }
652 const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(0); }
653 static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 0U; }
654
655 Value *getCompareOperand() { return getOperand(1); }
656 const Value *getCompareOperand() const { return getOperand(1); }
657
658 Value *getNewValOperand() { return getOperand(2); }
659 const Value *getNewValOperand() const { return getOperand(2); }
660
661 /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand.
662 unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const {
663 return getPointerOperand()->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
664 }
665
666 /// Returns the strongest permitted ordering on failure, given the
667 /// desired ordering on success.
668 ///
669 /// If the comparison in a cmpxchg operation fails, there is no atomic store
670 /// so release semantics cannot be provided. So this function drops explicit
671 /// Release requests from the AtomicOrdering. A SequentiallyConsistent
672 /// operation would remain SequentiallyConsistent.
673 static AtomicOrdering
674 getStrongestFailureOrdering(AtomicOrdering SuccessOrdering) {
675 switch (SuccessOrdering) {
676 default:
677 llvm_unreachable("invalid cmpxchg success ordering")__builtin_unreachable();
678 case AtomicOrdering::Release:
679 case AtomicOrdering::Monotonic:
680 return AtomicOrdering::Monotonic;
681 case AtomicOrdering::AcquireRelease:
682 case AtomicOrdering::Acquire:
683 return AtomicOrdering::Acquire;
684 case AtomicOrdering::SequentiallyConsistent:
685 return AtomicOrdering::SequentiallyConsistent;
686 }
687 }
688
689 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
690 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
691 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::AtomicCmpXchg;
692 }
693 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
694 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
695 }
696
697private:
698 // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding
699 // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
700 template <typename Bitfield>
701 void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) {
702 Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value);
703 }
704
705 /// The synchronization scope ID of this cmpxchg instruction. Not quite
706 /// enough room in SubClassData for everything, so synchronization scope ID
707 /// gets its own field.
708 SyncScope::ID SSID;
709};
710
711template <>
712struct OperandTraits<AtomicCmpXchgInst> :
713 public FixedNumOperandTraits<AtomicCmpXchgInst, 3> {
714};
715
716DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(AtomicCmpXchgInst, Value)AtomicCmpXchgInst::op_iterator AtomicCmpXchgInst::op_begin() {
return OperandTraits<AtomicCmpXchgInst>::op_begin(this
); } AtomicCmpXchgInst::const_op_iterator AtomicCmpXchgInst::
op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<AtomicCmpXchgInst>
::op_begin(const_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst*>(this)); } AtomicCmpXchgInst
::op_iterator AtomicCmpXchgInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits
<AtomicCmpXchgInst>::op_end(this); } AtomicCmpXchgInst::
const_op_iterator AtomicCmpXchgInst::op_end() const { return OperandTraits
<AtomicCmpXchgInst>::op_end(const_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst
*>(this)); } Value *AtomicCmpXchgInst::getOperand(unsigned
i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null<Value
>( OperandTraits<AtomicCmpXchgInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<AtomicCmpXchgInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void
AtomicCmpXchgInst::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture
) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<AtomicCmpXchgInst>::op_begin
(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned AtomicCmpXchgInst
::getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits<AtomicCmpXchgInst
>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> Use
&AtomicCmpXchgInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> const Use &
AtomicCmpXchgInst::Op() const { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); }
717
718//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
719// AtomicRMWInst Class
720//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
721
722/// an instruction that atomically reads a memory location,
723/// combines it with another value, and then stores the result back. Returns
724/// the old value.
725///
726class AtomicRMWInst : public Instruction {
727protected:
728 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
729 friend class Instruction;
730
731 AtomicRMWInst *cloneImpl() const;
732
733public:
734 /// This enumeration lists the possible modifications atomicrmw can make. In
735 /// the descriptions, 'p' is the pointer to the instruction's memory location,
736 /// 'old' is the initial value of *p, and 'v' is the other value passed to the
737 /// instruction. These instructions always return 'old'.
738 enum BinOp : unsigned {
739 /// *p = v
740 Xchg,
741 /// *p = old + v
742 Add,
743 /// *p = old - v
744 Sub,
745 /// *p = old & v
746 And,
747 /// *p = ~(old & v)
748 Nand,
749 /// *p = old | v
750 Or,
751 /// *p = old ^ v
752 Xor,
753 /// *p = old >signed v ? old : v
754 Max,
755 /// *p = old <signed v ? old : v
756 Min,
757 /// *p = old >unsigned v ? old : v
758 UMax,
759 /// *p = old <unsigned v ? old : v
760 UMin,
761
762 /// *p = old + v
763 FAdd,
764
765 /// *p = old - v
766 FSub,
767
768 FIRST_BINOP = Xchg,
769 LAST_BINOP = FSub,
770 BAD_BINOP
771 };
772
773private:
774 template <unsigned Offset>
775 using AtomicOrderingBitfieldElement =
776 typename Bitfield::Element<AtomicOrdering, Offset, 3,
777 AtomicOrdering::LAST>;
778
779 template <unsigned Offset>
780 using BinOpBitfieldElement =
781 typename Bitfield::Element<BinOp, Offset, 4, BinOp::LAST_BINOP>;
782
783public:
784 AtomicRMWInst(BinOp Operation, Value *Ptr, Value *Val, Align Alignment,
785 AtomicOrdering Ordering, SyncScope::ID SSID,
786 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
787 AtomicRMWInst(BinOp Operation, Value *Ptr, Value *Val, Align Alignment,
788 AtomicOrdering Ordering, SyncScope::ID SSID,
789 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
790
791 // allocate space for exactly two operands
792 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 2); }
793 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); }
794
795 using VolatileField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>;
796 using AtomicOrderingField =
797 AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<VolatileField::NextBit>;
798 using OperationField = BinOpBitfieldElement<AtomicOrderingField::NextBit>;
799 using AlignmentField = AlignmentBitfieldElementT<OperationField::NextBit>;
800 static_assert(Bitfield::areContiguous<VolatileField, AtomicOrderingField,
801 OperationField, AlignmentField>(),
802 "Bitfields must be contiguous");
803
804 BinOp getOperation() const { return getSubclassData<OperationField>(); }
805
806 static StringRef getOperationName(BinOp Op);
807
808 static bool isFPOperation(BinOp Op) {
809 switch (Op) {
810 case AtomicRMWInst::FAdd:
811 case AtomicRMWInst::FSub:
812 return true;
813 default:
814 return false;
815 }
816 }
817
818 void setOperation(BinOp Operation) {
819 setSubclassData<OperationField>(Operation);
820 }
821
822 /// Return the alignment of the memory that is being allocated by the
823 /// instruction.
824 Align getAlign() const {
825 return Align(1ULL << getSubclassData<AlignmentField>());
826 }
827
828 void setAlignment(Align Align) {
829 setSubclassData<AlignmentField>(Log2(Align));
830 }
831
832 /// Return true if this is a RMW on a volatile memory location.
833 ///
834 bool isVolatile() const { return getSubclassData<VolatileField>(); }
835
836 /// Specify whether this is a volatile RMW or not.
837 ///
838 void setVolatile(bool V) { setSubclassData<VolatileField>(V); }
839
840 /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
841 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
842
843 /// Returns the ordering constraint of this rmw instruction.
844 AtomicOrdering getOrdering() const {
845 return getSubclassData<AtomicOrderingField>();
846 }
847
848 /// Sets the ordering constraint of this rmw instruction.
849 void setOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) {
850 assert(Ordering != AtomicOrdering::NotAtomic &&((void)0)
851 "atomicrmw instructions can only be atomic.")((void)0);
852 setSubclassData<AtomicOrderingField>(Ordering);
853 }
854
855 /// Returns the synchronization scope ID of this rmw instruction.
856 SyncScope::ID getSyncScopeID() const {
857 return SSID;
858 }
859
860 /// Sets the synchronization scope ID of this rmw instruction.
861 void setSyncScopeID(SyncScope::ID SSID) {
862 this->SSID = SSID;
863 }
864
865 Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(0); }
866 const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(0); }
867 static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 0U; }
868
869 Value *getValOperand() { return getOperand(1); }
870 const Value *getValOperand() const { return getOperand(1); }
871
872 /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand.
873 unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const {
874 return getPointerOperand()->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
875 }
876
877 bool isFloatingPointOperation() const {
878 return isFPOperation(getOperation());
879 }
880
881 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
882 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
883 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::AtomicRMW;
884 }
885 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
886 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
887 }
888
889private:
890 void Init(BinOp Operation, Value *Ptr, Value *Val, Align Align,
891 AtomicOrdering Ordering, SyncScope::ID SSID);
892
893 // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding
894 // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
895 template <typename Bitfield>
896 void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) {
897 Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value);
898 }
899
900 /// The synchronization scope ID of this rmw instruction. Not quite enough
901 /// room in SubClassData for everything, so synchronization scope ID gets its
902 /// own field.
903 SyncScope::ID SSID;
904};
905
906template <>
907struct OperandTraits<AtomicRMWInst>
908 : public FixedNumOperandTraits<AtomicRMWInst,2> {
909};
910
911DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(AtomicRMWInst, Value)AtomicRMWInst::op_iterator AtomicRMWInst::op_begin() { return
OperandTraits<AtomicRMWInst>::op_begin(this); } AtomicRMWInst
::const_op_iterator AtomicRMWInst::op_begin() const { return OperandTraits
<AtomicRMWInst>::op_begin(const_cast<AtomicRMWInst*>
(this)); } AtomicRMWInst::op_iterator AtomicRMWInst::op_end()
{ return OperandTraits<AtomicRMWInst>::op_end(this); }
AtomicRMWInst::const_op_iterator AtomicRMWInst::op_end() const
{ return OperandTraits<AtomicRMWInst>::op_end(const_cast
<AtomicRMWInst*>(this)); } Value *AtomicRMWInst::getOperand
(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<AtomicRMWInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<AtomicRMWInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void AtomicRMWInst
::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture) { ((
void)0); OperandTraits<AtomicRMWInst>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture
] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned AtomicRMWInst::getNumOperands()
const { return OperandTraits<AtomicRMWInst>::operands(
this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> Use &AtomicRMWInst
::Op() { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
template <int Idx_nocapture> const Use &AtomicRMWInst
::Op() const { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this
); }
912
913//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
914// GetElementPtrInst Class
915//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
916
917// checkGEPType - Simple wrapper function to give a better assertion failure
918// message on bad indexes for a gep instruction.
919//
920inline Type *checkGEPType(Type *Ty) {
921 assert(Ty && "Invalid GetElementPtrInst indices for type!")((void)0);
922 return Ty;
923}
924
925/// an instruction for type-safe pointer arithmetic to
926/// access elements of arrays and structs
927///
928class GetElementPtrInst : public Instruction {
929 Type *SourceElementType;
930 Type *ResultElementType;
931
932 GetElementPtrInst(const GetElementPtrInst &GEPI);
933
934 /// Constructors - Create a getelementptr instruction with a base pointer an
935 /// list of indices. The first ctor can optionally insert before an existing
936 /// instruction, the second appends the new instruction to the specified
937 /// BasicBlock.
938 inline GetElementPtrInst(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr,
939 ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, unsigned Values,
940 const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore);
941 inline GetElementPtrInst(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr,
942 ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, unsigned Values,
943 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
944
945 void init(Value *Ptr, ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr);
946
947protected:
948 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
949 friend class Instruction;
950
951 GetElementPtrInst *cloneImpl() const;
952
953public:
954 static GetElementPtrInst *Create(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr,
955 ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList,
956 const Twine &NameStr = "",
957 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
958 unsigned Values = 1 + unsigned(IdxList.size());
959 assert(PointeeType && "Must specify element type")((void)0);
960 assert(cast<PointerType>(Ptr->getType()->getScalarType())((void)0)
961 ->isOpaqueOrPointeeTypeMatches(PointeeType))((void)0);
962 return new (Values) GetElementPtrInst(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList, Values,
963 NameStr, InsertBefore);
964 }
965
966 static GetElementPtrInst *Create(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr,
967 ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList,
968 const Twine &NameStr,
969 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
970 unsigned Values = 1 + unsigned(IdxList.size());
971 assert(PointeeType && "Must specify element type")((void)0);
972 assert(cast<PointerType>(Ptr->getType()->getScalarType())((void)0)
973 ->isOpaqueOrPointeeTypeMatches(PointeeType))((void)0);
974 return new (Values) GetElementPtrInst(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList, Values,
975 NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
976 }
977
978 LLVM_ATTRIBUTE_DEPRECATED(static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds([[deprecated("Use the version with explicit element type instead"
)]] static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds( Value *Ptr, ArrayRef
<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr = "", Instruction
*InsertBefore = nullptr)
979 Value *Ptr, ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr = "",[[deprecated("Use the version with explicit element type instead"
)]] static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds( Value *Ptr, ArrayRef
<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr = "", Instruction
*InsertBefore = nullptr)
980 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr),[[deprecated("Use the version with explicit element type instead"
)]] static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds( Value *Ptr, ArrayRef
<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr = "", Instruction
*InsertBefore = nullptr)
981 "Use the version with explicit element type instead")[[deprecated("Use the version with explicit element type instead"
)]] static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds( Value *Ptr, ArrayRef
<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr = "", Instruction
*InsertBefore = nullptr)
{
982 return CreateInBounds(
983 Ptr->getType()->getScalarType()->getPointerElementType(), Ptr, IdxList,
984 NameStr, InsertBefore);
985 }
986
987 /// Create an "inbounds" getelementptr. See the documentation for the
988 /// "inbounds" flag in LangRef.html for details.
989 static GetElementPtrInst *
990 CreateInBounds(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr, ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList,
991 const Twine &NameStr = "",
992 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
993 GetElementPtrInst *GEP =
994 Create(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList, NameStr, InsertBefore);
995 GEP->setIsInBounds(true);
996 return GEP;
997 }
998
999 LLVM_ATTRIBUTE_DEPRECATED(static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds([[deprecated("Use the version with explicit element type instead"
)]] static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds( Value *Ptr, ArrayRef
<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock
*InsertAtEnd)
1000 Value *Ptr, ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr,[[deprecated("Use the version with explicit element type instead"
)]] static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds( Value *Ptr, ArrayRef
<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock
*InsertAtEnd)
1001 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd),[[deprecated("Use the version with explicit element type instead"
)]] static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds( Value *Ptr, ArrayRef
<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock
*InsertAtEnd)
1002 "Use the version with explicit element type instead")[[deprecated("Use the version with explicit element type instead"
)]] static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds( Value *Ptr, ArrayRef
<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock
*InsertAtEnd)
{
1003 return CreateInBounds(
1004 Ptr->getType()->getScalarType()->getPointerElementType(), Ptr, IdxList,
1005 NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
1006 }
1007
1008 static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr,
1009 ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList,
1010 const Twine &NameStr,
1011 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
1012 GetElementPtrInst *GEP =
1013 Create(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
1014 GEP->setIsInBounds(true);
1015 return GEP;
1016 }
1017
1018 /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
1019 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
1020
1021 Type *getSourceElementType() const { return SourceElementType; }
1022
1023 void setSourceElementType(Type *Ty) { SourceElementType = Ty; }
1024 void setResultElementType(Type *Ty) { ResultElementType = Ty; }
1025
1026 Type *getResultElementType() const {
1027 assert(cast<PointerType>(getType()->getScalarType())((void)0)
1028 ->isOpaqueOrPointeeTypeMatches(ResultElementType))((void)0);
1029 return ResultElementType;
1030 }
1031
1032 /// Returns the address space of this instruction's pointer type.
1033 unsigned getAddressSpace() const {
1034 // Note that this is always the same as the pointer operand's address space
1035 // and that is cheaper to compute, so cheat here.
1036 return getPointerAddressSpace();
1037 }
1038
1039 /// Returns the result type of a getelementptr with the given source
1040 /// element type and indexes.
1041 ///
1042 /// Null is returned if the indices are invalid for the specified
1043 /// source element type.
1044 static Type *getIndexedType(Type *Ty, ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList);
1045 static Type *getIndexedType(Type *Ty, ArrayRef<Constant *> IdxList);
1046 static Type *getIndexedType(Type *Ty, ArrayRef<uint64_t> IdxList);
1047
1048 /// Return the type of the element at the given index of an indexable
1049 /// type. This is equivalent to "getIndexedType(Agg, {Zero, Idx})".
1050 ///
1051 /// Returns null if the type can't be indexed, or the given index is not
1052 /// legal for the given type.
1053 static Type *getTypeAtIndex(Type *Ty, Value *Idx);
1054 static Type *getTypeAtIndex(Type *Ty, uint64_t Idx);
1055
1056 inline op_iterator idx_begin() { return op_begin()+1; }
1057 inline const_op_iterator idx_begin() const { return op_begin()+1; }
1058 inline op_iterator idx_end() { return op_end(); }
1059 inline const_op_iterator idx_end() const { return op_end(); }
1060
1061 inline iterator_range<op_iterator> indices() {
1062 return make_range(idx_begin(), idx_end());
1063 }
1064
1065 inline iterator_range<const_op_iterator> indices() const {
1066 return make_range(idx_begin(), idx_end());
1067 }
1068
1069 Value *getPointerOperand() {
1070 return getOperand(0);
1071 }
1072 const Value *getPointerOperand() const {
1073 return getOperand(0);
1074 }
1075 static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() {
1076 return 0U; // get index for modifying correct operand.
1077 }
1078
1079 /// Method to return the pointer operand as a
1080 /// PointerType.
1081 Type *getPointerOperandType() const {
1082 return getPointerOperand()->getType();
1083 }
1084
1085 /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand.
1086 unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const {
1087 return getPointerOperandType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
1088 }
1089
1090 /// Returns the pointer type returned by the GEP
1091 /// instruction, which may be a vector of pointers.
1092 static Type *getGEPReturnType(Type *ElTy, Value *Ptr,
1093 ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList) {
1094 PointerType *OrigPtrTy = cast<PointerType>(Ptr->getType()->getScalarType());
1095 unsigned AddrSpace = OrigPtrTy->getAddressSpace();
1096 Type *ResultElemTy = checkGEPType(getIndexedType(ElTy, IdxList));
1097 Type *PtrTy = OrigPtrTy->isOpaque()
1098 ? PointerType::get(OrigPtrTy->getContext(), AddrSpace)
1099 : PointerType::get(ResultElemTy, AddrSpace);
1100 // Vector GEP
1101 if (auto *PtrVTy = dyn_cast<VectorType>(Ptr->getType())) {
1102 ElementCount EltCount = PtrVTy->getElementCount();
1103 return VectorType::get(PtrTy, EltCount);
1104 }
1105 for (Value *Index : IdxList)
1106 if (auto *IndexVTy = dyn_cast<VectorType>(Index->getType())) {
1107 ElementCount EltCount = IndexVTy->getElementCount();
1108 return VectorType::get(PtrTy, EltCount);
1109 }
1110 // Scalar GEP
1111 return PtrTy;
1112 }
1113
1114 unsigned getNumIndices() const { // Note: always non-negative
1115 return getNumOperands() - 1;
1116 }
1117
1118 bool hasIndices() const {
1119 return getNumOperands() > 1;
1120 }
1121
1122 /// Return true if all of the indices of this GEP are
1123 /// zeros. If so, the result pointer and the first operand have the same
1124 /// value, just potentially different types.
1125 bool hasAllZeroIndices() const;
1126
1127 /// Return true if all of the indices of this GEP are
1128 /// constant integers. If so, the result pointer and the first operand have
1129 /// a constant offset between them.
1130 bool hasAllConstantIndices() const;
1131
1132 /// Set or clear the inbounds flag on this GEP instruction.
1133 /// See LangRef.html for the meaning of inbounds on a getelementptr.
1134 void setIsInBounds(bool b = true);
1135
1136 /// Determine whether the GEP has the inbounds flag.
1137 bool isInBounds() const;
1138
1139 /// Accumulate the constant address offset of this GEP if possible.
1140 ///
1141 /// This routine accepts an APInt into which it will accumulate the constant
1142 /// offset of this GEP if the GEP is in fact constant. If the GEP is not
1143 /// all-constant, it returns false and the value of the offset APInt is
1144 /// undefined (it is *not* preserved!). The APInt passed into this routine
1145 /// must be at least as wide as the IntPtr type for the address space of
1146 /// the base GEP pointer.
1147 bool accumulateConstantOffset(const DataLayout &DL, APInt &Offset) const;
1148 bool collectOffset(const DataLayout &DL, unsigned BitWidth,
1149 MapVector<Value *, APInt> &VariableOffsets,
1150 APInt &ConstantOffset) const;
1151 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
1152 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
1153 return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::GetElementPtr);
1154 }
1155 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
1156 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
1157 }
1158};
1159
1160template <>
1161struct OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst> :
1162 public VariadicOperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst, 1> {
1163};
1164
1165GetElementPtrInst::GetElementPtrInst(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr,
1166 ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, unsigned Values,
1167 const Twine &NameStr,
1168 Instruction *InsertBefore)
1169 : Instruction(getGEPReturnType(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList), GetElementPtr,
1170 OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst>::op_end(this) - Values,
1171 Values, InsertBefore),
1172 SourceElementType(PointeeType),
1173 ResultElementType(getIndexedType(PointeeType, IdxList)) {
1174 assert(cast<PointerType>(getType()->getScalarType())((void)0)
1175 ->isOpaqueOrPointeeTypeMatches(ResultElementType))((void)0);
1176 init(Ptr, IdxList, NameStr);
1177}
1178
1179GetElementPtrInst::GetElementPtrInst(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr,
1180 ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, unsigned Values,
1181 const Twine &NameStr,
1182 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
1183 : Instruction(getGEPReturnType(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList), GetElementPtr,
1184 OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst>::op_end(this) - Values,
1185 Values, InsertAtEnd),
1186 SourceElementType(PointeeType),
1187 ResultElementType(getIndexedType(PointeeType, IdxList)) {
1188 assert(cast<PointerType>(getType()->getScalarType())((void)0)
1189 ->isOpaqueOrPointeeTypeMatches(ResultElementType))((void)0);
1190 init(Ptr, IdxList, NameStr);
1191}
1192
1193DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(GetElementPtrInst, Value)GetElementPtrInst::op_iterator GetElementPtrInst::op_begin() {
return OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst>::op_begin(this
); } GetElementPtrInst::const_op_iterator GetElementPtrInst::
op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst>
::op_begin(const_cast<GetElementPtrInst*>(this)); } GetElementPtrInst
::op_iterator GetElementPtrInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits
<GetElementPtrInst>::op_end(this); } GetElementPtrInst::
const_op_iterator GetElementPtrInst::op_end() const { return OperandTraits
<GetElementPtrInst>::op_end(const_cast<GetElementPtrInst
*>(this)); } Value *GetElementPtrInst::getOperand(unsigned
i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null<Value
>( OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<GetElementPtrInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void
GetElementPtrInst::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture
) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst>::op_begin
(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned GetElementPtrInst
::getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst
>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> Use
&GetElementPtrInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> const Use &
GetElementPtrInst::Op() const { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); }
1194
1195//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1196// ICmpInst Class
1197//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1198
1199/// This instruction compares its operands according to the predicate given
1200/// to the constructor. It only operates on integers or pointers. The operands
1201/// must be identical types.
1202/// Represent an integer comparison operator.
1203class ICmpInst: public CmpInst {
1204 void AssertOK() {
1205 assert(isIntPredicate() &&((void)0)
1206 "Invalid ICmp predicate value")((void)0);
1207 assert(getOperand(0)->getType() == getOperand(1)->getType() &&((void)0)
1208 "Both operands to ICmp instruction are not of the same type!")((void)0);
1209 // Check that the operands are the right type
1210 assert((getOperand(0)->getType()->isIntOrIntVectorTy() ||((void)0)
1211 getOperand(0)->getType()->isPtrOrPtrVectorTy()) &&((void)0)
1212 "Invalid operand types for ICmp instruction")((void)0);
1213 }
1214
1215protected:
1216 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
1217 friend class Instruction;
1218
1219 /// Clone an identical ICmpInst
1220 ICmpInst *cloneImpl() const;
1221
1222public:
1223 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics.
1224 ICmpInst(
1225 Instruction *InsertBefore, ///< Where to insert
1226 Predicate pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison
1227 Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression
1228 Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression
1229 const Twine &NameStr = "" ///< Name of the instruction
1230 ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()),
1231 Instruction::ICmp, pred, LHS, RHS, NameStr,
1232 InsertBefore) {
1233#ifndef NDEBUG1
1234 AssertOK();
1235#endif
1236 }
1237
1238 /// Constructor with insert-at-end semantics.
1239 ICmpInst(
1240 BasicBlock &InsertAtEnd, ///< Block to insert into.
1241 Predicate pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison
1242 Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression
1243 Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression
1244 const Twine &NameStr = "" ///< Name of the instruction
1245 ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()),
1246 Instruction::ICmp, pred, LHS, RHS, NameStr,
1247 &InsertAtEnd) {
1248#ifndef NDEBUG1
1249 AssertOK();
1250#endif
1251 }
1252
1253 /// Constructor with no-insertion semantics
1254 ICmpInst(
1255 Predicate pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison
1256 Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression
1257 Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression
1258 const Twine &NameStr = "" ///< Name of the instruction
1259 ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()),
1260 Instruction::ICmp, pred, LHS, RHS, NameStr) {
1261#ifndef NDEBUG1
1262 AssertOK();
1263#endif
1264 }
1265
1266 /// For example, EQ->EQ, SLE->SLE, UGT->SGT, etc.
1267 /// @returns the predicate that would be the result if the operand were
1268 /// regarded as signed.
1269 /// Return the signed version of the predicate
1270 Predicate getSignedPredicate() const {
1271 return getSignedPredicate(getPredicate());
1272 }
1273
1274 /// This is a static version that you can use without an instruction.
1275 /// Return the signed version of the predicate.
1276 static Predicate getSignedPredicate(Predicate pred);
1277
1278 /// For example, EQ->EQ, SLE->ULE, UGT->UGT, etc.
1279 /// @returns the predicate that would be the result if the operand were
1280 /// regarded as unsigned.
1281 /// Return the unsigned version of the predicate
1282 Predicate getUnsignedPredicate() const {
1283 return getUnsignedPredicate(getPredicate());
1284 }
1285
1286 /// This is a static version that you can use without an instruction.
1287 /// Return the unsigned version of the predicate.
1288 static Predicate getUnsignedPredicate(Predicate pred);
1289
1290 /// Return true if this predicate is either EQ or NE. This also
1291 /// tests for commutativity.
1292 static bool isEquality(Predicate P) {
1293 return P == ICMP_EQ || P == ICMP_NE;
1294 }
1295
1296 /// Return true if this predicate is either EQ or NE. This also
1297 /// tests for commutativity.
1298 bool isEquality() const {
1299 return isEquality(getPredicate());
1300 }
1301
1302 /// @returns true if the predicate of this ICmpInst is commutative
1303 /// Determine if this relation is commutative.
1304 bool isCommutative() const { return isEquality(); }
1305
1306 /// Return true if the predicate is relational (not EQ or NE).
1307 ///
1308 bool isRelational() const {
1309 return !isEquality();
1310 }
1311
1312 /// Return true if the predicate is relational (not EQ or NE).
1313 ///
1314 static bool isRelational(Predicate P) {
1315 return !isEquality(P);
1316 }
1317
1318 /// Return true if the predicate is SGT or UGT.
1319 ///
1320 static bool isGT(Predicate P) {
1321 return P == ICMP_SGT || P == ICMP_UGT;
1322 }
1323
1324 /// Return true if the predicate is SLT or ULT.
1325 ///
1326 static bool isLT(Predicate P) {
1327 return P == ICMP_SLT || P == ICMP_ULT;
1328 }
1329
1330 /// Return true if the predicate is SGE or UGE.
1331 ///
1332 static bool isGE(Predicate P) {
1333 return P == ICMP_SGE || P == ICMP_UGE;
1334 }
1335
1336 /// Return true if the predicate is SLE or ULE.
1337 ///
1338 static bool isLE(Predicate P) {
1339 return P == ICMP_SLE || P == ICMP_ULE;
1340 }
1341
1342 /// Exchange the two operands to this instruction in such a way that it does
1343 /// not modify the semantics of the instruction. The predicate value may be
1344 /// changed to retain the same result if the predicate is order dependent
1345 /// (e.g. ult).
1346 /// Swap operands and adjust predicate.
1347 void swapOperands() {
1348 setPredicate(getSwappedPredicate());
1349 Op<0>().swap(Op<1>());
1350 }
1351
1352 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
1353 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
1354 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::ICmp;
1355 }
1356 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
1357 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
1358 }
1359};
1360
1361//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1362// FCmpInst Class
1363//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1364
1365/// This instruction compares its operands according to the predicate given
1366/// to the constructor. It only operates on floating point values or packed
1367/// vectors of floating point values. The operands must be identical types.
1368/// Represents a floating point comparison operator.
1369class FCmpInst: public CmpInst {
1370 void AssertOK() {
1371 assert(isFPPredicate() && "Invalid FCmp predicate value")((void)0);
1372 assert(getOperand(0)->getType() == getOperand(1)->getType() &&((void)0)
1373 "Both operands to FCmp instruction are not of the same type!")((void)0);
1374 // Check that the operands are the right type
1375 assert(getOperand(0)->getType()->isFPOrFPVectorTy() &&((void)0)
1376 "Invalid operand types for FCmp instruction")((void)0);
1377 }
1378
1379protected:
1380 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
1381 friend class Instruction;
1382
1383 /// Clone an identical FCmpInst
1384 FCmpInst *cloneImpl() const;
1385
1386public:
1387 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics.
1388 FCmpInst(
1389 Instruction *InsertBefore, ///< Where to insert
1390 Predicate pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison
1391 Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression
1392 Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression
1393 const Twine &NameStr = "" ///< Name of the instruction
1394 ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()),
1395 Instruction::FCmp, pred, LHS, RHS, NameStr,
1396 InsertBefore) {
1397 AssertOK();
1398 }
1399
1400 /// Constructor with insert-at-end semantics.
1401 FCmpInst(
1402 BasicBlock &InsertAtEnd, ///< Block to insert into.
1403 Predicate pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison
1404 Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression
1405 Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression
1406 const Twine &NameStr = "" ///< Name of the instruction
1407 ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()),
1408 Instruction::FCmp, pred, LHS, RHS, NameStr,
1409 &InsertAtEnd) {
1410 AssertOK();
1411 }
1412
1413 /// Constructor with no-insertion semantics
1414 FCmpInst(
1415 Predicate Pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison
1416 Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression
1417 Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression
1418 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< Name of the instruction
1419 Instruction *FlagsSource = nullptr
1420 ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()), Instruction::FCmp, Pred, LHS,
1421 RHS, NameStr, nullptr, FlagsSource) {
1422 AssertOK();
1423 }
1424
1425 /// @returns true if the predicate of this instruction is EQ or NE.
1426 /// Determine if this is an equality predicate.
1427 static bool isEquality(Predicate Pred) {
1428 return Pred == FCMP_OEQ || Pred == FCMP_ONE || Pred == FCMP_UEQ ||
1429 Pred == FCMP_UNE;
1430 }
1431
1432 /// @returns true if the predicate of this instruction is EQ or NE.
1433 /// Determine if this is an equality predicate.
1434 bool isEquality() const { return isEquality(getPredicate()); }
1435
1436 /// @returns true if the predicate of this instruction is commutative.
1437 /// Determine if this is a commutative predicate.
1438 bool isCommutative() const {
1439 return isEquality() ||
1440 getPredicate() == FCMP_FALSE ||
1441 getPredicate() == FCMP_TRUE ||
1442 getPredicate() == FCMP_ORD ||
1443 getPredicate() == FCMP_UNO;
1444 }
1445
1446 /// @returns true if the predicate is relational (not EQ or NE).
1447 /// Determine if this a relational predicate.
1448 bool isRelational() const { return !isEquality(); }
1449
1450 /// Exchange the two operands to this instruction in such a way that it does
1451 /// not modify the semantics of the instruction. The predicate value may be
1452 /// changed to retain the same result if the predicate is order dependent
1453 /// (e.g. ult).
1454 /// Swap operands and adjust predicate.
1455 void swapOperands() {
1456 setPredicate(getSwappedPredicate());
1457 Op<0>().swap(Op<1>());
1458 }
1459
1460 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
1461 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
1462 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::FCmp;
1463 }
1464 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
1465 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
1466 }
1467};
1468
1469//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1470/// This class represents a function call, abstracting a target
1471/// machine's calling convention. This class uses low bit of the SubClassData
1472/// field to indicate whether or not this is a tail call. The rest of the bits
1473/// hold the calling convention of the call.
1474///
1475class CallInst : public CallBase {
1476 CallInst(const CallInst &CI);
1477
1478 /// Construct a CallInst given a range of arguments.
1479 /// Construct a CallInst from a range of arguments
1480 inline CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1481 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr,
1482 Instruction *InsertBefore);
1483
1484 inline CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1485 const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore)
1486 : CallInst(Ty, Func, Args, None, NameStr, InsertBefore) {}
1487
1488 /// Construct a CallInst given a range of arguments.
1489 /// Construct a CallInst from a range of arguments
1490 inline CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1491 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr,
1492 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
1493
1494 explicit CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *F, const Twine &NameStr,
1495 Instruction *InsertBefore);
1496
1497 CallInst(FunctionType *ty, Value *F, const Twine &NameStr,
1498 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
1499
1500 void init(FunctionType *FTy, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1501 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr);
1502 void init(FunctionType *FTy, Value *Func, const Twine &NameStr);
1503
1504 /// Compute the number of operands to allocate.
1505 static int ComputeNumOperands(int NumArgs, int NumBundleInputs = 0) {
1506 // We need one operand for the called function, plus the input operand
1507 // counts provided.
1508 return 1 + NumArgs + NumBundleInputs;
1509 }
1510
1511protected:
1512 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
1513 friend class Instruction;
1514
1515 CallInst *cloneImpl() const;
1516
1517public:
1518 static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *F, const Twine &NameStr = "",
1519 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
1520 return new (ComputeNumOperands(0)) CallInst(Ty, F, NameStr, InsertBefore);
1521 }
1522
1523 static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1524 const Twine &NameStr,
1525 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
1526 return new (ComputeNumOperands(Args.size()))
1527 CallInst(Ty, Func, Args, None, NameStr, InsertBefore);
1528 }
1529
1530 static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1531 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = None,
1532 const Twine &NameStr = "",
1533 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
1534 const int NumOperands =
1535 ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), CountBundleInputs(Bundles));
1536 const unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo);
1537
1538 return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes)
1539 CallInst(Ty, Func, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertBefore);
1540 }
1541
1542 static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *F, const Twine &NameStr,
1543 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
1544 return new (ComputeNumOperands(0)) CallInst(Ty, F, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
1545 }
1546
1547 static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1548 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
1549 return new (ComputeNumOperands(Args.size()))
1550 CallInst(Ty, Func, Args, None, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
1551 }
1552
1553 static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1554 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
1555 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
1556 const int NumOperands =
1557 ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), CountBundleInputs(Bundles));
1558 const unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo);
1559
1560 return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes)
1561 CallInst(Ty, Func, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
1562 }
1563
1564 static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, const Twine &NameStr = "",
1565 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
1566 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), NameStr,
1567 InsertBefore);
1568 }
1569
1570 static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1571 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = None,
1572 const Twine &NameStr = "",
1573 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
1574 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), Args, Bundles,
1575 NameStr, InsertBefore);
1576 }
1577
1578 static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1579 const Twine &NameStr,
1580 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
1581 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), Args, NameStr,
1582 InsertBefore);
1583 }
1584
1585 static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, const Twine &NameStr,
1586 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
1587 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), NameStr,
1588 InsertAtEnd);
1589 }
1590
1591 static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1592 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
1593 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), Args, NameStr,
1594 InsertAtEnd);
1595 }
1596
1597 static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1598 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
1599 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
1600 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), Args, Bundles,
1601 NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
1602 }
1603
1604 /// Create a clone of \p CI with a different set of operand bundles and
1605 /// insert it before \p InsertPt.
1606 ///
1607 /// The returned call instruction is identical \p CI in every way except that
1608 /// the operand bundles for the new instruction are set to the operand bundles
1609 /// in \p Bundles.
1610 static CallInst *Create(CallInst *CI, ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
1611 Instruction *InsertPt = nullptr);
1612
1613 /// Generate the IR for a call to malloc:
1614 /// 1. Compute the malloc call's argument as the specified type's size,
1615 /// possibly multiplied by the array size if the array size is not
1616 /// constant 1.
1617 /// 2. Call malloc with that argument.
1618 /// 3. Bitcast the result of the malloc call to the specified type.
1619 static Instruction *CreateMalloc(Instruction *InsertBefore, Type *IntPtrTy,
1620 Type *AllocTy, Value *AllocSize,
1621 Value *ArraySize = nullptr,
1622 Function *MallocF = nullptr,
1623 const Twine &Name = "");
1624 static Instruction *CreateMalloc(BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd, Type *IntPtrTy,
1625 Type *AllocTy, Value *AllocSize,
1626 Value *ArraySize = nullptr,
1627 Function *MallocF = nullptr,
1628 const Twine &Name = "");
1629 static Instruction *CreateMalloc(Instruction *InsertBefore, Type *IntPtrTy,
1630 Type *AllocTy, Value *AllocSize,
1631 Value *ArraySize = nullptr,
1632 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = None,
1633 Function *MallocF = nullptr,
1634 const Twine &Name = "");
1635 static Instruction *CreateMalloc(BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd, Type *IntPtrTy,
1636 Type *AllocTy, Value *AllocSize,
1637 Value *ArraySize = nullptr,
1638 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = None,
1639 Function *MallocF = nullptr,
1640 const Twine &Name = "");
1641 /// Generate the IR for a call to the builtin free function.
1642 static Instruction *CreateFree(Value *Source, Instruction *InsertBefore);
1643 static Instruction *CreateFree(Value *Source, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
1644 static Instruction *CreateFree(Value *Source,
1645 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
1646 Instruction *InsertBefore);
1647 static Instruction *CreateFree(Value *Source,
1648 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
1649 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
1650
1651 // Note that 'musttail' implies 'tail'.
1652 enum TailCallKind : unsigned {
1653 TCK_None = 0,
1654 TCK_Tail = 1,
1655 TCK_MustTail = 2,
1656 TCK_NoTail = 3,
1657 TCK_LAST = TCK_NoTail
1658 };
1659
1660 using TailCallKindField = Bitfield::Element<TailCallKind, 0, 2, TCK_LAST>;
1661 static_assert(
1662 Bitfield::areContiguous<TailCallKindField, CallBase::CallingConvField>(),
1663 "Bitfields must be contiguous");
1664
1665 TailCallKind getTailCallKind() const {
1666 return getSubclassData<TailCallKindField>();
1667 }
1668
1669 bool isTailCall() const {
1670 TailCallKind Kind = getTailCallKind();
1671 return Kind == TCK_Tail || Kind == TCK_MustTail;
1672 }
1673
1674 bool isMustTailCall() const { return getTailCallKind() == TCK_MustTail; }
1675
1676 bool isNoTailCall() const { return getTailCallKind() == TCK_NoTail; }
1677
1678 void setTailCallKind(TailCallKind TCK) {
1679 setSubclassData<TailCallKindField>(TCK);
1680 }
1681
1682 void setTailCall(bool IsTc = true) {
1683 setTailCallKind(IsTc ? TCK_Tail : TCK_None);
1684 }
1685
1686 /// Return true if the call can return twice
1687 bool canReturnTwice() const { return hasFnAttr(Attribute::ReturnsTwice); }
1688 void setCanReturnTwice() {
1689 addAttribute(AttributeList::FunctionIndex, Attribute::ReturnsTwice);
1690 }
1691
1692 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
1693 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
1694 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Call;
1695 }
1696 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
1697 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
1698 }
1699
1700 /// Updates profile metadata by scaling it by \p S / \p T.
1701 void updateProfWeight(uint64_t S, uint64_t T);
1702
1703private:
1704 // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding
1705 // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
1706 template <typename Bitfield>
1707 void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) {
1708 Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value);
1709 }
1710};
1711
1712CallInst::CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1713 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr,
1714 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
1715 : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::Call,
1716 OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) -
1717 (Args.size() + CountBundleInputs(Bundles) + 1),
1718 unsigned(Args.size() + CountBundleInputs(Bundles) + 1),
1719 InsertAtEnd) {
1720 init(Ty, Func, Args, Bundles, NameStr);
1721}
1722
1723CallInst::CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
1724 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr,
1725 Instruction *InsertBefore)
1726 : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::Call,
1727 OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) -
1728 (Args.size() + CountBundleInputs(Bundles) + 1),
1729 unsigned(Args.size() + CountBundleInputs(Bundles) + 1),
1730 InsertBefore) {
1731 init(Ty, Func, Args, Bundles, NameStr);
1732}
1733
1734//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1735// SelectInst Class
1736//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1737
1738/// This class represents the LLVM 'select' instruction.
1739///
1740class SelectInst : public Instruction {
1741 SelectInst(Value *C, Value *S1, Value *S2, const Twine &NameStr,
1742 Instruction *InsertBefore)
1743 : Instruction(S1->getType(), Instruction::Select,
1744 &Op<0>(), 3, InsertBefore) {
1745 init(C, S1, S2);
1746 setName(NameStr);
1747 }
1748
1749 SelectInst(Value *C, Value *S1, Value *S2, const Twine &NameStr,
1750 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
1751 : Instruction(S1->getType(), Instruction::Select,
1752 &Op<0>(), 3, InsertAtEnd) {
1753 init(C, S1, S2);
1754 setName(NameStr);
1755 }
1756
1757 void init(Value *C, Value *S1, Value *S2) {
1758 assert(!areInvalidOperands(C, S1, S2) && "Invalid operands for select")((void)0);
1759 Op<0>() = C;
1760 Op<1>() = S1;
1761 Op<2>() = S2;
1762 }
1763
1764protected:
1765 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
1766 friend class Instruction;
1767
1768 SelectInst *cloneImpl() const;
1769
1770public:
1771 static SelectInst *Create(Value *C, Value *S1, Value *S2,
1772 const Twine &NameStr = "",
1773 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr,
1774 Instruction *MDFrom = nullptr) {
1775 SelectInst *Sel = new(3) SelectInst(C, S1, S2, NameStr, InsertBefore);
1776 if (MDFrom)
1777 Sel->copyMetadata(*MDFrom);
1778 return Sel;
1779 }
1780
1781 static SelectInst *Create(Value *C, Value *S1, Value *S2,
1782 const Twine &NameStr,
1783 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
1784 return new(3) SelectInst(C, S1, S2, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
1785 }
1786
1787 const Value *getCondition() const { return Op<0>(); }
1788 const Value *getTrueValue() const { return Op<1>(); }
1789 const Value *getFalseValue() const { return Op<2>(); }
1790 Value *getCondition() { return Op<0>(); }
1791 Value *getTrueValue() { return Op<1>(); }
1792 Value *getFalseValue() { return Op<2>(); }
1793
1794 void setCondition(Value *V) { Op<0>() = V; }
1795 void setTrueValue(Value *V) { Op<1>() = V; }
1796 void setFalseValue(Value *V) { Op<2>() = V; }
1797
1798 /// Swap the true and false values of the select instruction.
1799 /// This doesn't swap prof metadata.
1800 void swapValues() { Op<1>().swap(Op<2>()); }
1801
1802 /// Return a string if the specified operands are invalid
1803 /// for a select operation, otherwise return null.
1804 static const char *areInvalidOperands(Value *Cond, Value *True, Value *False);
1805
1806 /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
1807 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
1808
1809 OtherOps getOpcode() const {
1810 return static_cast<OtherOps>(Instruction::getOpcode());
1811 }
1812
1813 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
1814 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
1815 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Select;
1816 }
1817 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
1818 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
1819 }
1820};
1821
1822template <>
1823struct OperandTraits<SelectInst> : public FixedNumOperandTraits<SelectInst, 3> {
1824};
1825
1826DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(SelectInst, Value)SelectInst::op_iterator SelectInst::op_begin() { return OperandTraits
<SelectInst>::op_begin(this); } SelectInst::const_op_iterator
SelectInst::op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<SelectInst
>::op_begin(const_cast<SelectInst*>(this)); } SelectInst
::op_iterator SelectInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits<
SelectInst>::op_end(this); } SelectInst::const_op_iterator
SelectInst::op_end() const { return OperandTraits<SelectInst
>::op_end(const_cast<SelectInst*>(this)); } Value *SelectInst
::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<SelectInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<SelectInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void SelectInst
::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture) { ((
void)0); OperandTraits<SelectInst>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture
] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned SelectInst::getNumOperands() const
{ return OperandTraits<SelectInst>::operands(this); } template
<int Idx_nocapture> Use &SelectInst::Op() { return
this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int
Idx_nocapture> const Use &SelectInst::Op() const { return
this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
1827
1828//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1829// VAArgInst Class
1830//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1831
1832/// This class represents the va_arg llvm instruction, which returns
1833/// an argument of the specified type given a va_list and increments that list
1834///
1835class VAArgInst : public UnaryInstruction {
1836protected:
1837 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
1838 friend class Instruction;
1839
1840 VAArgInst *cloneImpl() const;
1841
1842public:
1843 VAArgInst(Value *List, Type *Ty, const Twine &NameStr = "",
1844 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr)
1845 : UnaryInstruction(Ty, VAArg, List, InsertBefore) {
1846 setName(NameStr);
1847 }
1848
1849 VAArgInst(Value *List, Type *Ty, const Twine &NameStr,
1850 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
1851 : UnaryInstruction(Ty, VAArg, List, InsertAtEnd) {
1852 setName(NameStr);
1853 }
1854
1855 Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(0); }
1856 const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(0); }
1857 static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 0U; }
1858
1859 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
1860 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
1861 return I->getOpcode() == VAArg;
1862 }
1863 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
1864 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
1865 }
1866};
1867
1868//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1869// ExtractElementInst Class
1870//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1871
1872/// This instruction extracts a single (scalar)
1873/// element from a VectorType value
1874///
1875class ExtractElementInst : public Instruction {
1876 ExtractElementInst(Value *Vec, Value *Idx, const Twine &NameStr = "",
1877 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
1878 ExtractElementInst(Value *Vec, Value *Idx, const Twine &NameStr,
1879 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
1880
1881protected:
1882 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
1883 friend class Instruction;
1884
1885 ExtractElementInst *cloneImpl() const;
1886
1887public:
1888 static ExtractElementInst *Create(Value *Vec, Value *Idx,
1889 const Twine &NameStr = "",
1890 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
1891 return new(2) ExtractElementInst(Vec, Idx, NameStr, InsertBefore);
1892 }
1893
1894 static ExtractElementInst *Create(Value *Vec, Value *Idx,
1895 const Twine &NameStr,
1896 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
1897 return new(2) ExtractElementInst(Vec, Idx, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
1898 }
1899
1900 /// Return true if an extractelement instruction can be
1901 /// formed with the specified operands.
1902 static bool isValidOperands(const Value *Vec, const Value *Idx);
1903
1904 Value *getVectorOperand() { return Op<0>(); }
1905 Value *getIndexOperand() { return Op<1>(); }
1906 const Value *getVectorOperand() const { return Op<0>(); }
1907 const Value *getIndexOperand() const { return Op<1>(); }
1908
1909 VectorType *getVectorOperandType() const {
1910 return cast<VectorType>(getVectorOperand()->getType());
1911 }
1912
1913 /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
1914 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
1915
1916 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
1917 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
1918 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::ExtractElement;
1919 }
1920 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
1921 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
1922 }
1923};
1924
1925template <>
1926struct OperandTraits<ExtractElementInst> :
1927 public FixedNumOperandTraits<ExtractElementInst, 2> {
1928};
1929
1930DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(ExtractElementInst, Value)ExtractElementInst::op_iterator ExtractElementInst::op_begin(
) { return OperandTraits<ExtractElementInst>::op_begin(
this); } ExtractElementInst::const_op_iterator ExtractElementInst
::op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<ExtractElementInst
>::op_begin(const_cast<ExtractElementInst*>(this)); }
ExtractElementInst::op_iterator ExtractElementInst::op_end()
{ return OperandTraits<ExtractElementInst>::op_end(this
); } ExtractElementInst::const_op_iterator ExtractElementInst
::op_end() const { return OperandTraits<ExtractElementInst
>::op_end(const_cast<ExtractElementInst*>(this)); } Value
*ExtractElementInst::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const {
((void)0); return cast_or_null<Value>( OperandTraits<
ExtractElementInst>::op_begin(const_cast<ExtractElementInst
*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void ExtractElementInst::
setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture) { ((void
)0); OperandTraits<ExtractElementInst>::op_begin(this)[
i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned ExtractElementInst::
getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits<ExtractElementInst
>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> Use
&ExtractElementInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> const Use &
ExtractElementInst::Op() const { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); }
1931
1932//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1933// InsertElementInst Class
1934//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1935
1936/// This instruction inserts a single (scalar)
1937/// element into a VectorType value
1938///
1939class InsertElementInst : public Instruction {
1940 InsertElementInst(Value *Vec, Value *NewElt, Value *Idx,
1941 const Twine &NameStr = "",
1942 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
1943 InsertElementInst(Value *Vec, Value *NewElt, Value *Idx, const Twine &NameStr,
1944 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
1945
1946protected:
1947 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
1948 friend class Instruction;
1949
1950 InsertElementInst *cloneImpl() const;
1951
1952public:
1953 static InsertElementInst *Create(Value *Vec, Value *NewElt, Value *Idx,
1954 const Twine &NameStr = "",
1955 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
1956 return new(3) InsertElementInst(Vec, NewElt, Idx, NameStr, InsertBefore);
1957 }
1958
1959 static InsertElementInst *Create(Value *Vec, Value *NewElt, Value *Idx,
1960 const Twine &NameStr,
1961 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
1962 return new(3) InsertElementInst(Vec, NewElt, Idx, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
1963 }
1964
1965 /// Return true if an insertelement instruction can be
1966 /// formed with the specified operands.
1967 static bool isValidOperands(const Value *Vec, const Value *NewElt,
1968 const Value *Idx);
1969
1970 /// Overload to return most specific vector type.
1971 ///
1972 VectorType *getType() const {
1973 return cast<VectorType>(Instruction::getType());
1974 }
1975
1976 /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
1977 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
1978
1979 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
1980 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
1981 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::InsertElement;
1982 }
1983 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
1984 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
1985 }
1986};
1987
1988template <>
1989struct OperandTraits<InsertElementInst> :
1990 public FixedNumOperandTraits<InsertElementInst, 3> {
1991};
1992
1993DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(InsertElementInst, Value)InsertElementInst::op_iterator InsertElementInst::op_begin() {
return OperandTraits<InsertElementInst>::op_begin(this
); } InsertElementInst::const_op_iterator InsertElementInst::
op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<InsertElementInst>
::op_begin(const_cast<InsertElementInst*>(this)); } InsertElementInst
::op_iterator InsertElementInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits
<InsertElementInst>::op_end(this); } InsertElementInst::
const_op_iterator InsertElementInst::op_end() const { return OperandTraits
<InsertElementInst>::op_end(const_cast<InsertElementInst
*>(this)); } Value *InsertElementInst::getOperand(unsigned
i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null<Value
>( OperandTraits<InsertElementInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<InsertElementInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void
InsertElementInst::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture
) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<InsertElementInst>::op_begin
(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned InsertElementInst
::getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits<InsertElementInst
>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> Use
&InsertElementInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> const Use &
InsertElementInst::Op() const { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); }
1994
1995//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1996// ShuffleVectorInst Class
1997//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1998
1999constexpr int UndefMaskElem = -1;
2000
2001/// This instruction constructs a fixed permutation of two
2002/// input vectors.
2003///
2004/// For each element of the result vector, the shuffle mask selects an element
2005/// from one of the input vectors to copy to the result. Non-negative elements
2006/// in the mask represent an index into the concatenated pair of input vectors.
2007/// UndefMaskElem (-1) specifies that the result element is undefined.
2008///
2009/// For scalable vectors, all the elements of the mask must be 0 or -1. This
2010/// requirement may be relaxed in the future.
2011class ShuffleVectorInst : public Instruction {
2012 SmallVector<int, 4> ShuffleMask;
2013 Constant *ShuffleMaskForBitcode;
2014
2015protected:
2016 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
2017 friend class Instruction;
2018
2019 ShuffleVectorInst *cloneImpl() const;
2020
2021public:
2022 ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, Value *V2, Value *Mask,
2023 const Twine &NameStr = "",
2024 Instruction *InsertBefor = nullptr);
2025 ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, Value *V2, Value *Mask,
2026 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
2027 ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, Value *V2, ArrayRef<int> Mask,
2028 const Twine &NameStr = "",
2029 Instruction *InsertBefor = nullptr);
2030 ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, Value *V2, ArrayRef<int> Mask,
2031 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
2032
2033 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 2); }
2034 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { return User::operator delete(Ptr); }
2035
2036 /// Swap the operands and adjust the mask to preserve the semantics
2037 /// of the instruction.
2038 void commute();
2039
2040 /// Return true if a shufflevector instruction can be
2041 /// formed with the specified operands.
2042 static bool isValidOperands(const Value *V1, const Value *V2,
2043 const Value *Mask);
2044 static bool isValidOperands(const Value *V1, const Value *V2,
2045 ArrayRef<int> Mask);
2046
2047 /// Overload to return most specific vector type.
2048 ///
2049 VectorType *getType() const {
2050 return cast<VectorType>(Instruction::getType());
2051 }
2052
2053 /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
2054 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
2055
2056 /// Return the shuffle mask value of this instruction for the given element
2057 /// index. Return UndefMaskElem if the element is undef.
2058 int getMaskValue(unsigned Elt) const { return ShuffleMask[Elt]; }
2059
2060 /// Convert the input shuffle mask operand to a vector of integers. Undefined
2061 /// elements of the mask are returned as UndefMaskElem.
2062 static void getShuffleMask(const Constant *Mask,
2063 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Result);
2064
2065 /// Return the mask for this instruction as a vector of integers. Undefined
2066 /// elements of the mask are returned as UndefMaskElem.
2067 void getShuffleMask(SmallVectorImpl<int> &Result) const {
2068 Result.assign(ShuffleMask.begin(), ShuffleMask.end());
2069 }
2070
2071 /// Return the mask for this instruction, for use in bitcode.
2072 ///
2073 /// TODO: This is temporary until we decide a new bitcode encoding for
2074 /// shufflevector.
2075 Constant *getShuffleMaskForBitcode() const { return ShuffleMaskForBitcode; }
2076
2077 static Constant *convertShuffleMaskForBitcode(ArrayRef<int> Mask,
2078 Type *ResultTy);
2079
2080 void setShuffleMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask);
2081
2082 ArrayRef<int> getShuffleMask() const { return ShuffleMask; }
2083
2084 /// Return true if this shuffle returns a vector with a different number of
2085 /// elements than its source vectors.
2086 /// Examples: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <1,2,3>
2087 /// shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <1,2,3,4,5>
2088 bool changesLength() const {
2089 unsigned NumSourceElts = cast<VectorType>(Op<0>()->getType())
2090 ->getElementCount()
2091 .getKnownMinValue();
2092 unsigned NumMaskElts = ShuffleMask.size();
2093 return NumSourceElts != NumMaskElts;
2094 }
2095
2096 /// Return true if this shuffle returns a vector with a greater number of
2097 /// elements than its source vectors.
2098 /// Example: shufflevector <2 x n> A, <2 x n> B, <1,2,3>
2099 bool increasesLength() const {
2100 unsigned NumSourceElts = cast<VectorType>(Op<0>()->getType())
2101 ->getElementCount()
2102 .getKnownMinValue();
2103 unsigned NumMaskElts = ShuffleMask.size();
2104 return NumSourceElts < NumMaskElts;
2105 }
2106
2107 /// Return true if this shuffle mask chooses elements from exactly one source
2108 /// vector.
2109 /// Example: <7,5,undef,7>
2110 /// This assumes that vector operands are the same length as the mask.
2111 static bool isSingleSourceMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask);
2112 static bool isSingleSourceMask(const Constant *Mask) {
2113 assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant.")((void)0);
2114 SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts;
2115 getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts);
2116 return isSingleSourceMask(MaskAsInts);
2117 }
2118
2119 /// Return true if this shuffle chooses elements from exactly one source
2120 /// vector without changing the length of that vector.
2121 /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <3,0,undef,3>
2122 /// TODO: Optionally allow length-changing shuffles.
2123 bool isSingleSource() const {
2124 return !changesLength() && isSingleSourceMask(ShuffleMask);
2125 }
2126
2127 /// Return true if this shuffle mask chooses elements from exactly one source
2128 /// vector without lane crossings. A shuffle using this mask is not
2129 /// necessarily a no-op because it may change the number of elements from its
2130 /// input vectors or it may provide demanded bits knowledge via undef lanes.
2131 /// Example: <undef,undef,2,3>
2132 static bool isIdentityMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask);
2133 static bool isIdentityMask(const Constant *Mask) {
2134 assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant.")((void)0);
2135 SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts;
2136 getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts);
2137 return isIdentityMask(MaskAsInts);
2138 }
2139
2140 /// Return true if this shuffle chooses elements from exactly one source
2141 /// vector without lane crossings and does not change the number of elements
2142 /// from its input vectors.
2143 /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <4,undef,6,undef>
2144 bool isIdentity() const {
2145 return !changesLength() && isIdentityMask(ShuffleMask);
2146 }
2147
2148 /// Return true if this shuffle lengthens exactly one source vector with
2149 /// undefs in the high elements.
2150 bool isIdentityWithPadding() const;
2151
2152 /// Return true if this shuffle extracts the first N elements of exactly one
2153 /// source vector.
2154 bool isIdentityWithExtract() const;
2155
2156 /// Return true if this shuffle concatenates its 2 source vectors. This
2157 /// returns false if either input is undefined. In that case, the shuffle is
2158 /// is better classified as an identity with padding operation.
2159 bool isConcat() const;
2160
2161 /// Return true if this shuffle mask chooses elements from its source vectors
2162 /// without lane crossings. A shuffle using this mask would be
2163 /// equivalent to a vector select with a constant condition operand.
2164 /// Example: <4,1,6,undef>
2165 /// This returns false if the mask does not choose from both input vectors.
2166 /// In that case, the shuffle is better classified as an identity shuffle.
2167 /// This assumes that vector operands are the same length as the mask
2168 /// (a length-changing shuffle can never be equivalent to a vector select).
2169 static bool isSelectMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask);
2170 static bool isSelectMask(const Constant *Mask) {
2171 assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant.")((void)0);
2172 SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts;
2173 getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts);
2174 return isSelectMask(MaskAsInts);
2175 }
2176
2177 /// Return true if this shuffle chooses elements from its source vectors
2178 /// without lane crossings and all operands have the same number of elements.
2179 /// In other words, this shuffle is equivalent to a vector select with a
2180 /// constant condition operand.
2181 /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <undef,1,6,3>
2182 /// This returns false if the mask does not choose from both input vectors.
2183 /// In that case, the shuffle is better classified as an identity shuffle.
2184 /// TODO: Optionally allow length-changing shuffles.
2185 bool isSelect() const {
2186 return !changesLength() && isSelectMask(ShuffleMask);
2187 }
2188
2189 /// Return true if this shuffle mask swaps the order of elements from exactly
2190 /// one source vector.
2191 /// Example: <7,6,undef,4>
2192 /// This assumes that vector operands are the same length as the mask.
2193 static bool isReverseMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask);
2194 static bool isReverseMask(const Constant *Mask) {
2195 assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant.")((void)0);
2196 SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts;
2197 getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts);
2198 return isReverseMask(MaskAsInts);
2199 }
2200
2201 /// Return true if this shuffle swaps the order of elements from exactly
2202 /// one source vector.
2203 /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <3,undef,1,undef>
2204 /// TODO: Optionally allow length-changing shuffles.
2205 bool isReverse() const {
2206 return !changesLength() && isReverseMask(ShuffleMask);
2207 }
2208
2209 /// Return true if this shuffle mask chooses all elements with the same value
2210 /// as the first element of exactly one source vector.
2211 /// Example: <4,undef,undef,4>
2212 /// This assumes that vector operands are the same length as the mask.
2213 static bool isZeroEltSplatMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask);
2214 static bool isZeroEltSplatMask(const Constant *Mask) {
2215 assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant.")((void)0);
2216 SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts;
2217 getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts);
2218 return isZeroEltSplatMask(MaskAsInts);
2219 }
2220
2221 /// Return true if all elements of this shuffle are the same value as the
2222 /// first element of exactly one source vector without changing the length
2223 /// of that vector.
2224 /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <undef,0,undef,0>
2225 /// TODO: Optionally allow length-changing shuffles.
2226 /// TODO: Optionally allow splats from other elements.
2227 bool isZeroEltSplat() const {
2228 return !changesLength() && isZeroEltSplatMask(ShuffleMask);
2229 }
2230
2231 /// Return true if this shuffle mask is a transpose mask.
2232 /// Transpose vector masks transpose a 2xn matrix. They read corresponding
2233 /// even- or odd-numbered vector elements from two n-dimensional source
2234 /// vectors and write each result into consecutive elements of an
2235 /// n-dimensional destination vector. Two shuffles are necessary to complete
2236 /// the transpose, one for the even elements and another for the odd elements.
2237 /// This description closely follows how the TRN1 and TRN2 AArch64
2238 /// instructions operate.
2239 ///
2240 /// For example, a simple 2x2 matrix can be transposed with:
2241 ///
2242 /// ; Original matrix
2243 /// m0 = < a, b >
2244 /// m1 = < c, d >
2245 ///
2246 /// ; Transposed matrix
2247 /// t0 = < a, c > = shufflevector m0, m1, < 0, 2 >
2248 /// t1 = < b, d > = shufflevector m0, m1, < 1, 3 >
2249 ///
2250 /// For matrices having greater than n columns, the resulting nx2 transposed
2251 /// matrix is stored in two result vectors such that one vector contains
2252 /// interleaved elements from all the even-numbered rows and the other vector
2253 /// contains interleaved elements from all the odd-numbered rows. For example,
2254 /// a 2x4 matrix can be transposed with:
2255 ///
2256 /// ; Original matrix
2257 /// m0 = < a, b, c, d >
2258 /// m1 = < e, f, g, h >
2259 ///
2260 /// ; Transposed matrix
2261 /// t0 = < a, e, c, g > = shufflevector m0, m1 < 0, 4, 2, 6 >
2262 /// t1 = < b, f, d, h > = shufflevector m0, m1 < 1, 5, 3, 7 >
2263 static bool isTransposeMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask);
2264 static bool isTransposeMask(const Constant *Mask) {
2265 assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant.")((void)0);
2266 SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts;
2267 getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts);
2268 return isTransposeMask(MaskAsInts);
2269 }
2270
2271 /// Return true if this shuffle transposes the elements of its inputs without
2272 /// changing the length of the vectors. This operation may also be known as a
2273 /// merge or interleave. See the description for isTransposeMask() for the
2274 /// exact specification.
2275 /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <0,4,2,6>
2276 bool isTranspose() const {
2277 return !changesLength() && isTransposeMask(ShuffleMask);
2278 }
2279
2280 /// Return true if this shuffle mask is an extract subvector mask.
2281 /// A valid extract subvector mask returns a smaller vector from a single
2282 /// source operand. The base extraction index is returned as well.
2283 static bool isExtractSubvectorMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask, int NumSrcElts,
2284 int &Index);
2285 static bool isExtractSubvectorMask(const Constant *Mask, int NumSrcElts,
2286 int &Index) {
2287 assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant.")((void)0);
2288 // Not possible to express a shuffle mask for a scalable vector for this
2289 // case.
2290 if (isa<ScalableVectorType>(Mask->getType()))
2291 return false;
2292 SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts;
2293 getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts);
2294 return isExtractSubvectorMask(MaskAsInts, NumSrcElts, Index);
2295 }
2296
2297 /// Return true if this shuffle mask is an extract subvector mask.
2298 bool isExtractSubvectorMask(int &Index) const {
2299 // Not possible to express a shuffle mask for a scalable vector for this
2300 // case.
2301 if (isa<ScalableVectorType>(getType()))
2302 return false;
2303
2304 int NumSrcElts =
2305 cast<FixedVectorType>(Op<0>()->getType())->getNumElements();
2306 return isExtractSubvectorMask(ShuffleMask, NumSrcElts, Index);
2307 }
2308
2309 /// Change values in a shuffle permute mask assuming the two vector operands
2310 /// of length InVecNumElts have swapped position.
2311 static void commuteShuffleMask(MutableArrayRef<int> Mask,
2312 unsigned InVecNumElts) {
2313 for (int &Idx : Mask) {
2314 if (Idx == -1)
2315 continue;
2316 Idx = Idx < (int)InVecNumElts ? Idx + InVecNumElts : Idx - InVecNumElts;
2317 assert(Idx >= 0 && Idx < (int)InVecNumElts * 2 &&((void)0)
2318 "shufflevector mask index out of range")((void)0);
2319 }
2320 }
2321
2322 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
2323 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
2324 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::ShuffleVector;
2325 }
2326 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
2327 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
2328 }
2329};
2330
2331template <>
2332struct OperandTraits<ShuffleVectorInst>
2333 : public FixedNumOperandTraits<ShuffleVectorInst, 2> {};
2334
2335DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(ShuffleVectorInst, Value)ShuffleVectorInst::op_iterator ShuffleVectorInst::op_begin() {
return OperandTraits<ShuffleVectorInst>::op_begin(this
); } ShuffleVectorInst::const_op_iterator ShuffleVectorInst::
op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<ShuffleVectorInst>
::op_begin(const_cast<ShuffleVectorInst*>(this)); } ShuffleVectorInst
::op_iterator ShuffleVectorInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits
<ShuffleVectorInst>::op_end(this); } ShuffleVectorInst::
const_op_iterator ShuffleVectorInst::op_end() const { return OperandTraits
<ShuffleVectorInst>::op_end(const_cast<ShuffleVectorInst
*>(this)); } Value *ShuffleVectorInst::getOperand(unsigned
i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null<Value
>( OperandTraits<ShuffleVectorInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<ShuffleVectorInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void
ShuffleVectorInst::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture
) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<ShuffleVectorInst>::op_begin
(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned ShuffleVectorInst
::getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits<ShuffleVectorInst
>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> Use
&ShuffleVectorInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> const Use &
ShuffleVectorInst::Op() const { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); }
2336
2337//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2338// ExtractValueInst Class
2339//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2340
2341/// This instruction extracts a struct member or array
2342/// element value from an aggregate value.
2343///
2344class ExtractValueInst : public UnaryInstruction {
2345 SmallVector<unsigned, 4> Indices;
2346
2347 ExtractValueInst(const ExtractValueInst &EVI);
2348
2349 /// Constructors - Create a extractvalue instruction with a base aggregate
2350 /// value and a list of indices. The first ctor can optionally insert before
2351 /// an existing instruction, the second appends the new instruction to the
2352 /// specified BasicBlock.
2353 inline ExtractValueInst(Value *Agg,
2354 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2355 const Twine &NameStr,
2356 Instruction *InsertBefore);
2357 inline ExtractValueInst(Value *Agg,
2358 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2359 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
2360
2361 void init(ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, const Twine &NameStr);
2362
2363protected:
2364 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
2365 friend class Instruction;
2366
2367 ExtractValueInst *cloneImpl() const;
2368
2369public:
2370 static ExtractValueInst *Create(Value *Agg,
2371 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2372 const Twine &NameStr = "",
2373 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
2374 return new
2375 ExtractValueInst(Agg, Idxs, NameStr, InsertBefore);
2376 }
2377
2378 static ExtractValueInst *Create(Value *Agg,
2379 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2380 const Twine &NameStr,
2381 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
2382 return new ExtractValueInst(Agg, Idxs, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
2383 }
2384
2385 /// Returns the type of the element that would be extracted
2386 /// with an extractvalue instruction with the specified parameters.
2387 ///
2388 /// Null is returned if the indices are invalid for the specified type.
2389 static Type *getIndexedType(Type *Agg, ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs);
2390
2391 using idx_iterator = const unsigned*;
2392
2393 inline idx_iterator idx_begin() const { return Indices.begin(); }
2394 inline idx_iterator idx_end() const { return Indices.end(); }
2395 inline iterator_range<idx_iterator> indices() const {
2396 return make_range(idx_begin(), idx_end());
2397 }
2398
2399 Value *getAggregateOperand() {
2400 return getOperand(0);
2401 }
2402 const Value *getAggregateOperand() const {
2403 return getOperand(0);
2404 }
2405 static unsigned getAggregateOperandIndex() {
2406 return 0U; // get index for modifying correct operand
2407 }
2408
2409 ArrayRef<unsigned> getIndices() const {
2410 return Indices;
2411 }
2412
2413 unsigned getNumIndices() const {
2414 return (unsigned)Indices.size();
2415 }
2416
2417 bool hasIndices() const {
2418 return true;
2419 }
2420
2421 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
2422 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
2423 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::ExtractValue;
2424 }
2425 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
2426 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
2427 }
2428};
2429
2430ExtractValueInst::ExtractValueInst(Value *Agg,
2431 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2432 const Twine &NameStr,
2433 Instruction *InsertBefore)
2434 : UnaryInstruction(checkGEPType(getIndexedType(Agg->getType(), Idxs)),
2435 ExtractValue, Agg, InsertBefore) {
2436 init(Idxs, NameStr);
2437}
2438
2439ExtractValueInst::ExtractValueInst(Value *Agg,
2440 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2441 const Twine &NameStr,
2442 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
2443 : UnaryInstruction(checkGEPType(getIndexedType(Agg->getType(), Idxs)),
2444 ExtractValue, Agg, InsertAtEnd) {
2445 init(Idxs, NameStr);
2446}
2447
2448//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2449// InsertValueInst Class
2450//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2451
2452/// This instruction inserts a struct field of array element
2453/// value into an aggregate value.
2454///
2455class InsertValueInst : public Instruction {
2456 SmallVector<unsigned, 4> Indices;
2457
2458 InsertValueInst(const InsertValueInst &IVI);
2459
2460 /// Constructors - Create a insertvalue instruction with a base aggregate
2461 /// value, a value to insert, and a list of indices. The first ctor can
2462 /// optionally insert before an existing instruction, the second appends
2463 /// the new instruction to the specified BasicBlock.
2464 inline InsertValueInst(Value *Agg, Value *Val,
2465 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2466 const Twine &NameStr,
2467 Instruction *InsertBefore);
2468 inline InsertValueInst(Value *Agg, Value *Val,
2469 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2470 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
2471
2472 /// Constructors - These two constructors are convenience methods because one
2473 /// and two index insertvalue instructions are so common.
2474 InsertValueInst(Value *Agg, Value *Val, unsigned Idx,
2475 const Twine &NameStr = "",
2476 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
2477 InsertValueInst(Value *Agg, Value *Val, unsigned Idx, const Twine &NameStr,
2478 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
2479
2480 void init(Value *Agg, Value *Val, ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2481 const Twine &NameStr);
2482
2483protected:
2484 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
2485 friend class Instruction;
2486
2487 InsertValueInst *cloneImpl() const;
2488
2489public:
2490 // allocate space for exactly two operands
2491 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 2); }
2492 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); }
2493
2494 static InsertValueInst *Create(Value *Agg, Value *Val,
2495 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2496 const Twine &NameStr = "",
2497 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
2498 return new InsertValueInst(Agg, Val, Idxs, NameStr, InsertBefore);
2499 }
2500
2501 static InsertValueInst *Create(Value *Agg, Value *Val,
2502 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2503 const Twine &NameStr,
2504 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
2505 return new InsertValueInst(Agg, Val, Idxs, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
2506 }
2507
2508 /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
2509 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
2510
2511 using idx_iterator = const unsigned*;
2512
2513 inline idx_iterator idx_begin() const { return Indices.begin(); }
2514 inline idx_iterator idx_end() const { return Indices.end(); }
2515 inline iterator_range<idx_iterator> indices() const {
2516 return make_range(idx_begin(), idx_end());
2517 }
2518
2519 Value *getAggregateOperand() {
2520 return getOperand(0);
2521 }
2522 const Value *getAggregateOperand() const {
2523 return getOperand(0);
2524 }
2525 static unsigned getAggregateOperandIndex() {
2526 return 0U; // get index for modifying correct operand
2527 }
2528
2529 Value *getInsertedValueOperand() {
2530 return getOperand(1);
2531 }
2532 const Value *getInsertedValueOperand() const {
2533 return getOperand(1);
2534 }
2535 static unsigned getInsertedValueOperandIndex() {
2536 return 1U; // get index for modifying correct operand
2537 }
2538
2539 ArrayRef<unsigned> getIndices() const {
2540 return Indices;
2541 }
2542
2543 unsigned getNumIndices() const {
2544 return (unsigned)Indices.size();
2545 }
2546
2547 bool hasIndices() const {
2548 return true;
2549 }
2550
2551 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
2552 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
2553 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::InsertValue;
2554 }
2555 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
2556 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
2557 }
2558};
2559
2560template <>
2561struct OperandTraits<InsertValueInst> :
2562 public FixedNumOperandTraits<InsertValueInst, 2> {
2563};
2564
2565InsertValueInst::InsertValueInst(Value *Agg,
2566 Value *Val,
2567 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2568 const Twine &NameStr,
2569 Instruction *InsertBefore)
2570 : Instruction(Agg->getType(), InsertValue,
2571 OperandTraits<InsertValueInst>::op_begin(this),
2572 2, InsertBefore) {
2573 init(Agg, Val, Idxs, NameStr);
2574}
2575
2576InsertValueInst::InsertValueInst(Value *Agg,
2577 Value *Val,
2578 ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs,
2579 const Twine &NameStr,
2580 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
2581 : Instruction(Agg->getType(), InsertValue,
2582 OperandTraits<InsertValueInst>::op_begin(this),
2583 2, InsertAtEnd) {
2584 init(Agg, Val, Idxs, NameStr);
2585}
2586
2587DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(InsertValueInst, Value)InsertValueInst::op_iterator InsertValueInst::op_begin() { return
OperandTraits<InsertValueInst>::op_begin(this); } InsertValueInst
::const_op_iterator InsertValueInst::op_begin() const { return
OperandTraits<InsertValueInst>::op_begin(const_cast<
InsertValueInst*>(this)); } InsertValueInst::op_iterator InsertValueInst
::op_end() { return OperandTraits<InsertValueInst>::op_end
(this); } InsertValueInst::const_op_iterator InsertValueInst::
op_end() const { return OperandTraits<InsertValueInst>::
op_end(const_cast<InsertValueInst*>(this)); } Value *InsertValueInst
::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<InsertValueInst>::op_begin
(const_cast<InsertValueInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()
); } void InsertValueInst::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value
*Val_nocapture) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<InsertValueInst
>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned
InsertValueInst::getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits
<InsertValueInst>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture
> Use &InsertValueInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<
Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture>
const Use &InsertValueInst::Op() const { return this->
OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
2588
2589//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2590// PHINode Class
2591//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2592
2593// PHINode - The PHINode class is used to represent the magical mystical PHI
2594// node, that can not exist in nature, but can be synthesized in a computer
2595// scientist's overactive imagination.
2596//
2597class PHINode : public Instruction {
2598 /// The number of operands actually allocated. NumOperands is
2599 /// the number actually in use.
2600 unsigned ReservedSpace;
2601
2602 PHINode(const PHINode &PN);
2603
2604 explicit PHINode(Type *Ty, unsigned NumReservedValues,
2605 const Twine &NameStr = "",
2606 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr)
2607 : Instruction(Ty, Instruction::PHI, nullptr, 0, InsertBefore),
2608 ReservedSpace(NumReservedValues) {
2609 assert(!Ty->isTokenTy() && "PHI nodes cannot have token type!")((void)0);
2610 setName(NameStr);
2611 allocHungoffUses(ReservedSpace);
2612 }
2613
2614 PHINode(Type *Ty, unsigned NumReservedValues, const Twine &NameStr,
2615 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
2616 : Instruction(Ty, Instruction::PHI, nullptr, 0, InsertAtEnd),
2617 ReservedSpace(NumReservedValues) {
2618 assert(!Ty->isTokenTy() && "PHI nodes cannot have token type!")((void)0);
2619 setName(NameStr);
2620 allocHungoffUses(ReservedSpace);
2621 }
2622
2623protected:
2624 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
2625 friend class Instruction;
2626
2627 PHINode *cloneImpl() const;
2628
2629 // allocHungoffUses - this is more complicated than the generic
2630 // User::allocHungoffUses, because we have to allocate Uses for the incoming
2631 // values and pointers to the incoming blocks, all in one allocation.
2632 void allocHungoffUses(unsigned N) {
2633 User::allocHungoffUses(N, /* IsPhi */ true);
2634 }
2635
2636public:
2637 /// Constructors - NumReservedValues is a hint for the number of incoming
2638 /// edges that this phi node will have (use 0 if you really have no idea).
2639 static PHINode *Create(Type *Ty, unsigned NumReservedValues,
2640 const Twine &NameStr = "",
2641 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
2642 return new PHINode(Ty, NumReservedValues, NameStr, InsertBefore);
2643 }
2644
2645 static PHINode *Create(Type *Ty, unsigned NumReservedValues,
2646 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
2647 return new PHINode(Ty, NumReservedValues, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
2648 }
2649
2650 /// Provide fast operand accessors
2651 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
2652
2653 // Block iterator interface. This provides access to the list of incoming
2654 // basic blocks, which parallels the list of incoming values.
2655
2656 using block_iterator = BasicBlock **;
2657 using const_block_iterator = BasicBlock * const *;
2658
2659 block_iterator block_begin() {
2660 return reinterpret_cast<block_iterator>(op_begin() + ReservedSpace);
2661 }
2662
2663 const_block_iterator block_begin() const {
2664 return reinterpret_cast<const_block_iterator>(op_begin() + ReservedSpace);
2665 }
2666
2667 block_iterator block_end() {
2668 return block_begin() + getNumOperands();
2669 }
2670
2671 const_block_iterator block_end() const {
2672 return block_begin() + getNumOperands();
2673 }
2674
2675 iterator_range<block_iterator> blocks() {
2676 return make_range(block_begin(), block_end());
2677 }
2678
2679 iterator_range<const_block_iterator> blocks() const {
2680 return make_range(block_begin(), block_end());
2681 }
2682
2683 op_range incoming_values() { return operands(); }
2684
2685 const_op_range incoming_values() const { return operands(); }
2686
2687 /// Return the number of incoming edges
2688 ///
2689 unsigned getNumIncomingValues() const { return getNumOperands(); }
2690
2691 /// Return incoming value number x
2692 ///
2693 Value *getIncomingValue(unsigned i) const {
2694 return getOperand(i);
2695 }
2696 void setIncomingValue(unsigned i, Value *V) {
2697 assert(V && "PHI node got a null value!")((void)0);
2698 assert(getType() == V->getType() &&((void)0)
2699 "All operands to PHI node must be the same type as the PHI node!")((void)0);
2700 setOperand(i, V);
2701 }
2702
2703 static unsigned getOperandNumForIncomingValue(unsigned i) {
2704 return i;
2705 }
2706
2707 static unsigned getIncomingValueNumForOperand(unsigned i) {
2708 return i;
2709 }
2710
2711 /// Return incoming basic block number @p i.
2712 ///
2713 BasicBlock *getIncomingBlock(unsigned i) const {
2714 return block_begin()[i];
2715 }
2716
2717 /// Return incoming basic block corresponding
2718 /// to an operand of the PHI.
2719 ///
2720 BasicBlock *getIncomingBlock(const Use &U) const {
2721 assert(this == U.getUser() && "Iterator doesn't point to PHI's Uses?")((void)0);
2722 return getIncomingBlock(unsigned(&U - op_begin()));
2723 }
2724
2725 /// Return incoming basic block corresponding
2726 /// to value use iterator.
2727 ///
2728 BasicBlock *getIncomingBlock(Value::const_user_iterator I) const {
2729 return getIncomingBlock(I.getUse());
2730 }
2731
2732 void setIncomingBlock(unsigned i, BasicBlock *BB) {
2733 assert(BB && "PHI node got a null basic block!")((void)0);
2734 block_begin()[i] = BB;
2735 }
2736
2737 /// Replace every incoming basic block \p Old to basic block \p New.
2738 void replaceIncomingBlockWith(const BasicBlock *Old, BasicBlock *New) {
2739 assert(New && Old && "PHI node got a null basic block!")((void)0);
2740 for (unsigned Op = 0, NumOps = getNumOperands(); Op != NumOps; ++Op)
2741 if (getIncomingBlock(Op) == Old)
2742 setIncomingBlock(Op, New);
2743 }
2744
2745 /// Add an incoming value to the end of the PHI list
2746 ///
2747 void addIncoming(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB) {
2748 if (getNumOperands() == ReservedSpace)
2749 growOperands(); // Get more space!
2750 // Initialize some new operands.
2751 setNumHungOffUseOperands(getNumOperands() + 1);
2752 setIncomingValue(getNumOperands() - 1, V);
2753 setIncomingBlock(getNumOperands() - 1, BB);
2754 }
2755
2756 /// Remove an incoming value. This is useful if a
2757 /// predecessor basic block is deleted. The value removed is returned.
2758 ///
2759 /// If the last incoming value for a PHI node is removed (and DeletePHIIfEmpty
2760 /// is true), the PHI node is destroyed and any uses of it are replaced with
2761 /// dummy values. The only time there should be zero incoming values to a PHI
2762 /// node is when the block is dead, so this strategy is sound.
2763 ///
2764 Value *removeIncomingValue(unsigned Idx, bool DeletePHIIfEmpty = true);
2765
2766 Value *removeIncomingValue(const BasicBlock *BB, bool DeletePHIIfEmpty=true) {
2767 int Idx = getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2768 assert(Idx >= 0 && "Invalid basic block argument to remove!")((void)0);
2769 return removeIncomingValue(Idx, DeletePHIIfEmpty);
2770 }
2771
2772 /// Return the first index of the specified basic
2773 /// block in the value list for this PHI. Returns -1 if no instance.
2774 ///
2775 int getBasicBlockIndex(const BasicBlock *BB) const {
2776 for (unsigned i = 0, e = getNumOperands(); i != e; ++i)
2777 if (block_begin()[i] == BB)
2778 return i;
2779 return -1;
2780 }
2781
2782 Value *getIncomingValueForBlock(const BasicBlock *BB) const {
2783 int Idx = getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2784 assert(Idx >= 0 && "Invalid basic block argument!")((void)0);
2785 return getIncomingValue(Idx);
2786 }
2787
2788 /// Set every incoming value(s) for block \p BB to \p V.
2789 void setIncomingValueForBlock(const BasicBlock *BB, Value *V) {
2790 assert(BB && "PHI node got a null basic block!")((void)0);
2791 bool Found = false;
2792 for (unsigned Op = 0, NumOps = getNumOperands(); Op != NumOps; ++Op)
2793 if (getIncomingBlock(Op) == BB) {
2794 Found = true;
2795 setIncomingValue(Op, V);
2796 }
2797 (void)Found;
2798 assert(Found && "Invalid basic block argument to set!")((void)0);
2799 }
2800
2801 /// If the specified PHI node always merges together the
2802 /// same value, return the value, otherwise return null.
2803 Value *hasConstantValue() const;
2804
2805 /// Whether the specified PHI node always merges
2806 /// together the same value, assuming undefs are equal to a unique
2807 /// non-undef value.
2808 bool hasConstantOrUndefValue() const;
2809
2810 /// If the PHI node is complete which means all of its parent's predecessors
2811 /// have incoming value in this PHI, return true, otherwise return false.
2812 bool isComplete() const {
2813 return llvm::all_of(predecessors(getParent()),
2814 [this](const BasicBlock *Pred) {
2815 return getBasicBlockIndex(Pred) >= 0;
2816 });
2817 }
2818
2819 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
2820 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
2821 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::PHI;
2822 }
2823 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
2824 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
2825 }
2826
2827private:
2828 void growOperands();
2829};
2830
2831template <>
2832struct OperandTraits<PHINode> : public HungoffOperandTraits<2> {
2833};
2834
2835DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(PHINode, Value)PHINode::op_iterator PHINode::op_begin() { return OperandTraits
<PHINode>::op_begin(this); } PHINode::const_op_iterator
PHINode::op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<PHINode>
::op_begin(const_cast<PHINode*>(this)); } PHINode::op_iterator
PHINode::op_end() { return OperandTraits<PHINode>::op_end
(this); } PHINode::const_op_iterator PHINode::op_end() const {
return OperandTraits<PHINode>::op_end(const_cast<PHINode
*>(this)); } Value *PHINode::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture
) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null<Value>( OperandTraits
<PHINode>::op_begin(const_cast<PHINode*>(this))[i_nocapture
].get()); } void PHINode::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value
*Val_nocapture) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<PHINode>::op_begin
(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned PHINode::getNumOperands
() const { return OperandTraits<PHINode>::operands(this
); } template <int Idx_nocapture> Use &PHINode::Op(
) { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); } template
<int Idx_nocapture> const Use &PHINode::Op() const
{ return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
2836
2837//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2838// LandingPadInst Class
2839//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2840
2841//===---------------------------------------------------------------------------
2842/// The landingpad instruction holds all of the information
2843/// necessary to generate correct exception handling. The landingpad instruction
2844/// cannot be moved from the top of a landing pad block, which itself is
2845/// accessible only from the 'unwind' edge of an invoke. This uses the
2846/// SubclassData field in Value to store whether or not the landingpad is a
2847/// cleanup.
2848///
2849class LandingPadInst : public Instruction {
2850 using CleanupField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>;
2851
2852 /// The number of operands actually allocated. NumOperands is
2853 /// the number actually in use.
2854 unsigned ReservedSpace;
2855
2856 LandingPadInst(const LandingPadInst &LP);
2857
2858public:
2859 enum ClauseType { Catch, Filter };
2860
2861private:
2862 explicit LandingPadInst(Type *RetTy, unsigned NumReservedValues,
2863 const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore);
2864 explicit LandingPadInst(Type *RetTy, unsigned NumReservedValues,
2865 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
2866
2867 // Allocate space for exactly zero operands.
2868 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S); }
2869
2870 void growOperands(unsigned Size);
2871 void init(unsigned NumReservedValues, const Twine &NameStr);
2872
2873protected:
2874 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
2875 friend class Instruction;
2876
2877 LandingPadInst *cloneImpl() const;
2878
2879public:
2880 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); }
2881
2882 /// Constructors - NumReservedClauses is a hint for the number of incoming
2883 /// clauses that this landingpad will have (use 0 if you really have no idea).
2884 static LandingPadInst *Create(Type *RetTy, unsigned NumReservedClauses,
2885 const Twine &NameStr = "",
2886 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
2887 static LandingPadInst *Create(Type *RetTy, unsigned NumReservedClauses,
2888 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
2889
2890 /// Provide fast operand accessors
2891 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
2892
2893 /// Return 'true' if this landingpad instruction is a
2894 /// cleanup. I.e., it should be run when unwinding even if its landing pad
2895 /// doesn't catch the exception.
2896 bool isCleanup() const { return getSubclassData<CleanupField>(); }
2897
2898 /// Indicate that this landingpad instruction is a cleanup.
2899 void setCleanup(bool V) { setSubclassData<CleanupField>(V); }
2900
2901 /// Add a catch or filter clause to the landing pad.
2902 void addClause(Constant *ClauseVal);
2903
2904 /// Get the value of the clause at index Idx. Use isCatch/isFilter to
2905 /// determine what type of clause this is.
2906 Constant *getClause(unsigned Idx) const {
2907 return cast<Constant>(getOperandList()[Idx]);
2908 }
2909
2910 /// Return 'true' if the clause and index Idx is a catch clause.
2911 bool isCatch(unsigned Idx) const {
2912 return !isa<ArrayType>(getOperandList()[Idx]->getType());
2913 }
2914
2915 /// Return 'true' if the clause and index Idx is a filter clause.
2916 bool isFilter(unsigned Idx) const {
2917 return isa<ArrayType>(getOperandList()[Idx]->getType());
2918 }
2919
2920 /// Get the number of clauses for this landing pad.
2921 unsigned getNumClauses() const { return getNumOperands(); }
2922
2923 /// Grow the size of the operand list to accommodate the new
2924 /// number of clauses.
2925 void reserveClauses(unsigned Size) { growOperands(Size); }
2926
2927 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
2928 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
2929 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::LandingPad;
2930 }
2931 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
2932 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
2933 }
2934};
2935
2936template <>
2937struct OperandTraits<LandingPadInst> : public HungoffOperandTraits<1> {
2938};
2939
2940DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(LandingPadInst, Value)LandingPadInst::op_iterator LandingPadInst::op_begin() { return
OperandTraits<LandingPadInst>::op_begin(this); } LandingPadInst
::const_op_iterator LandingPadInst::op_begin() const { return
OperandTraits<LandingPadInst>::op_begin(const_cast<
LandingPadInst*>(this)); } LandingPadInst::op_iterator LandingPadInst
::op_end() { return OperandTraits<LandingPadInst>::op_end
(this); } LandingPadInst::const_op_iterator LandingPadInst::op_end
() const { return OperandTraits<LandingPadInst>::op_end
(const_cast<LandingPadInst*>(this)); } Value *LandingPadInst
::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<LandingPadInst>::op_begin(
const_cast<LandingPadInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get());
} void LandingPadInst::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value
*Val_nocapture) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<LandingPadInst
>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned
LandingPadInst::getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits
<LandingPadInst>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture
> Use &LandingPadInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<
Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture>
const Use &LandingPadInst::Op() const { return this->
OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
2941
2942//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2943// ReturnInst Class
2944//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2945
2946//===---------------------------------------------------------------------------
2947/// Return a value (possibly void), from a function. Execution
2948/// does not continue in this function any longer.
2949///
2950class ReturnInst : public Instruction {
2951 ReturnInst(const ReturnInst &RI);
2952
2953private:
2954 // ReturnInst constructors:
2955 // ReturnInst() - 'ret void' instruction
2956 // ReturnInst( null) - 'ret void' instruction
2957 // ReturnInst(Value* X) - 'ret X' instruction
2958 // ReturnInst( null, Inst *I) - 'ret void' instruction, insert before I
2959 // ReturnInst(Value* X, Inst *I) - 'ret X' instruction, insert before I
2960 // ReturnInst( null, BB *B) - 'ret void' instruction, insert @ end of B
2961 // ReturnInst(Value* X, BB *B) - 'ret X' instruction, insert @ end of B
2962 //
2963 // NOTE: If the Value* passed is of type void then the constructor behaves as
2964 // if it was passed NULL.
2965 explicit ReturnInst(LLVMContext &C, Value *retVal = nullptr,
2966 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
2967 ReturnInst(LLVMContext &C, Value *retVal, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
2968 explicit ReturnInst(LLVMContext &C, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
2969
2970protected:
2971 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
2972 friend class Instruction;
2973
2974 ReturnInst *cloneImpl() const;
2975
2976public:
2977 static ReturnInst* Create(LLVMContext &C, Value *retVal = nullptr,
2978 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
2979 return new(!!retVal) ReturnInst(C, retVal, InsertBefore);
2980 }
2981
2982 static ReturnInst* Create(LLVMContext &C, Value *retVal,
2983 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
2984 return new(!!retVal) ReturnInst(C, retVal, InsertAtEnd);
2985 }
2986
2987 static ReturnInst* Create(LLVMContext &C, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
2988 return new(0) ReturnInst(C, InsertAtEnd);
2989 }
2990
2991 /// Provide fast operand accessors
2992 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
2993
2994 /// Convenience accessor. Returns null if there is no return value.
2995 Value *getReturnValue() const {
2996 return getNumOperands() != 0 ? getOperand(0) : nullptr;
2997 }
2998
2999 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 0; }
3000
3001 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
3002 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
3003 return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Ret);
3004 }
3005 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
3006 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
3007 }
3008
3009private:
3010 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned idx) const {
3011 llvm_unreachable("ReturnInst has no successors!")__builtin_unreachable();
3012 }
3013
3014 void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *B) {
3015 llvm_unreachable("ReturnInst has no successors!")__builtin_unreachable();
3016 }
3017};
3018
3019template <>
3020struct OperandTraits<ReturnInst> : public VariadicOperandTraits<ReturnInst> {
3021};
3022
3023DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(ReturnInst, Value)ReturnInst::op_iterator ReturnInst::op_begin() { return OperandTraits
<ReturnInst>::op_begin(this); } ReturnInst::const_op_iterator
ReturnInst::op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<ReturnInst
>::op_begin(const_cast<ReturnInst*>(this)); } ReturnInst
::op_iterator ReturnInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits<
ReturnInst>::op_end(this); } ReturnInst::const_op_iterator
ReturnInst::op_end() const { return OperandTraits<ReturnInst
>::op_end(const_cast<ReturnInst*>(this)); } Value *ReturnInst
::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<ReturnInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<ReturnInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void ReturnInst
::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture) { ((
void)0); OperandTraits<ReturnInst>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture
] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned ReturnInst::getNumOperands() const
{ return OperandTraits<ReturnInst>::operands(this); } template
<int Idx_nocapture> Use &ReturnInst::Op() { return
this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int
Idx_nocapture> const Use &ReturnInst::Op() const { return
this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
3024
3025//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3026// BranchInst Class
3027//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3028
3029//===---------------------------------------------------------------------------
3030/// Conditional or Unconditional Branch instruction.
3031///
3032class BranchInst : public Instruction {
3033 /// Ops list - Branches are strange. The operands are ordered:
3034 /// [Cond, FalseDest,] TrueDest. This makes some accessors faster because
3035 /// they don't have to check for cond/uncond branchness. These are mostly
3036 /// accessed relative from op_end().
3037 BranchInst(const BranchInst &BI);
3038 // BranchInst constructors (where {B, T, F} are blocks, and C is a condition):
3039 // BranchInst(BB *B) - 'br B'
3040 // BranchInst(BB* T, BB *F, Value *C) - 'br C, T, F'
3041 // BranchInst(BB* B, Inst *I) - 'br B' insert before I
3042 // BranchInst(BB* T, BB *F, Value *C, Inst *I) - 'br C, T, F', insert before I
3043 // BranchInst(BB* B, BB *I) - 'br B' insert at end
3044 // BranchInst(BB* T, BB *F, Value *C, BB *I) - 'br C, T, F', insert at end
3045 explicit BranchInst(BasicBlock *IfTrue, Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
3046 BranchInst(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *IfFalse, Value *Cond,
3047 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
3048 BranchInst(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
3049 BranchInst(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *IfFalse, Value *Cond,
3050 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
3051
3052 void AssertOK();
3053
3054protected:
3055 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
3056 friend class Instruction;
3057
3058 BranchInst *cloneImpl() const;
3059
3060public:
3061 /// Iterator type that casts an operand to a basic block.
3062 ///
3063 /// This only makes sense because the successors are stored as adjacent
3064 /// operands for branch instructions.
3065 struct succ_op_iterator
3066 : iterator_adaptor_base<succ_op_iterator, value_op_iterator,
3067 std::random_access_iterator_tag, BasicBlock *,
3068 ptrdiff_t, BasicBlock *, BasicBlock *> {
3069 explicit succ_op_iterator(value_op_iterator I) : iterator_adaptor_base(I) {}
3070
3071 BasicBlock *operator*() const { return cast<BasicBlock>(*I); }
3072 BasicBlock *operator->() const { return operator*(); }
3073 };
3074
3075 /// The const version of `succ_op_iterator`.
3076 struct const_succ_op_iterator
3077 : iterator_adaptor_base<const_succ_op_iterator, const_value_op_iterator,
3078 std::random_access_iterator_tag,
3079 const BasicBlock *, ptrdiff_t, const BasicBlock *,
3080 const BasicBlock *> {
3081 explicit const_succ_op_iterator(const_value_op_iterator I)
3082 : iterator_adaptor_base(I) {}
3083
3084 const BasicBlock *operator*() const { return cast<BasicBlock>(*I); }
3085 const BasicBlock *operator->() const { return operator*(); }
3086 };
3087
3088 static BranchInst *Create(BasicBlock *IfTrue,
3089 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
3090 return new(1) BranchInst(IfTrue, InsertBefore);
3091 }
3092
3093 static BranchInst *Create(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *IfFalse,
3094 Value *Cond, Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
3095 return new(3) BranchInst(IfTrue, IfFalse, Cond, InsertBefore);
3096 }
3097
3098 static BranchInst *Create(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
3099 return new(1) BranchInst(IfTrue, InsertAtEnd);
3100 }
3101
3102 static BranchInst *Create(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *IfFalse,
3103 Value *Cond, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
3104 return new(3) BranchInst(IfTrue, IfFalse, Cond, InsertAtEnd);
3105 }
3106
3107 /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
3108 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
3109
3110 bool isUnconditional() const { return getNumOperands() == 1; }
3111 bool isConditional() const { return getNumOperands() == 3; }
3112
3113 Value *getCondition() const {
3114 assert(isConditional() && "Cannot get condition of an uncond branch!")((void)0);
3115 return Op<-3>();
3116 }
3117
3118 void setCondition(Value *V) {
3119 assert(isConditional() && "Cannot set condition of unconditional branch!")((void)0);
3120 Op<-3>() = V;
3121 }
3122
3123 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 1+isConditional(); }
3124
3125 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned i) const {
3126 assert(i < getNumSuccessors() && "Successor # out of range for Branch!")((void)0);
3127 return cast_or_null<BasicBlock>((&Op<-1>() - i)->get());
3128 }
3129
3130 void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *NewSucc) {
3131 assert(idx < getNumSuccessors() && "Successor # out of range for Branch!")((void)0);
3132 *(&Op<-1>() - idx) = NewSucc;
3133 }
3134
3135 /// Swap the successors of this branch instruction.
3136 ///
3137 /// Swaps the successors of the branch instruction. This also swaps any
3138 /// branch weight metadata associated with the instruction so that it
3139 /// continues to map correctly to each operand.
3140 void swapSuccessors();
3141
3142 iterator_range<succ_op_iterator> successors() {
3143 return make_range(
3144 succ_op_iterator(std::next(value_op_begin(), isConditional() ? 1 : 0)),
3145 succ_op_iterator(value_op_end()));
3146 }
3147
3148 iterator_range<const_succ_op_iterator> successors() const {
3149 return make_range(const_succ_op_iterator(
3150 std::next(value_op_begin(), isConditional() ? 1 : 0)),
3151 const_succ_op_iterator(value_op_end()));
3152 }
3153
3154 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
3155 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
3156 return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Br);
3157 }
3158 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
3159 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
3160 }
3161};
3162
3163template <>
3164struct OperandTraits<BranchInst> : public VariadicOperandTraits<BranchInst, 1> {
3165};
3166
3167DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(BranchInst, Value)BranchInst::op_iterator BranchInst::op_begin() { return OperandTraits
<BranchInst>::op_begin(this); } BranchInst::const_op_iterator
BranchInst::op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<BranchInst
>::op_begin(const_cast<BranchInst*>(this)); } BranchInst
::op_iterator BranchInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits<
BranchInst>::op_end(this); } BranchInst::const_op_iterator
BranchInst::op_end() const { return OperandTraits<BranchInst
>::op_end(const_cast<BranchInst*>(this)); } Value *BranchInst
::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<BranchInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<BranchInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void BranchInst
::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture) { ((
void)0); OperandTraits<BranchInst>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture
] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned BranchInst::getNumOperands() const
{ return OperandTraits<BranchInst>::operands(this); } template
<int Idx_nocapture> Use &BranchInst::Op() { return
this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int
Idx_nocapture> const Use &BranchInst::Op() const { return
this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
3168
3169//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3170// SwitchInst Class
3171//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3172
3173//===---------------------------------------------------------------------------
3174/// Multiway switch
3175///
3176class SwitchInst : public Instruction {
3177 unsigned ReservedSpace;
3178
3179 // Operand[0] = Value to switch on
3180 // Operand[1] = Default basic block destination
3181 // Operand[2n ] = Value to match
3182 // Operand[2n+1] = BasicBlock to go to on match
3183 SwitchInst(const SwitchInst &SI);
3184
3185 /// Create a new switch instruction, specifying a value to switch on and a
3186 /// default destination. The number of additional cases can be specified here
3187 /// to make memory allocation more efficient. This constructor can also
3188 /// auto-insert before another instruction.
3189 SwitchInst(Value *Value, BasicBlock *Default, unsigned NumCases,
3190 Instruction *InsertBefore);
3191
3192 /// Create a new switch instruction, specifying a value to switch on and a
3193 /// default destination. The number of additional cases can be specified here
3194 /// to make memory allocation more efficient. This constructor also
3195 /// auto-inserts at the end of the specified BasicBlock.
3196 SwitchInst(Value *Value, BasicBlock *Default, unsigned NumCases,
3197 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
3198
3199 // allocate space for exactly zero operands
3200 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S); }
3201
3202 void init(Value *Value, BasicBlock *Default, unsigned NumReserved);
3203 void growOperands();
3204
3205protected:
3206 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
3207 friend class Instruction;
3208
3209 SwitchInst *cloneImpl() const;
3210
3211public:
3212 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); }
3213
3214 // -2
3215 static const unsigned DefaultPseudoIndex = static_cast<unsigned>(~0L-1);
3216
3217 template <typename CaseHandleT> class CaseIteratorImpl;
3218
3219 /// A handle to a particular switch case. It exposes a convenient interface
3220 /// to both the case value and the successor block.
3221 ///
3222 /// We define this as a template and instantiate it to form both a const and
3223 /// non-const handle.
3224 template <typename SwitchInstT, typename ConstantIntT, typename BasicBlockT>
3225 class CaseHandleImpl {
3226 // Directly befriend both const and non-const iterators.
3227 friend class SwitchInst::CaseIteratorImpl<
3228 CaseHandleImpl<SwitchInstT, ConstantIntT, BasicBlockT>>;
3229
3230 protected:
3231 // Expose the switch type we're parameterized with to the iterator.
3232 using SwitchInstType = SwitchInstT;
3233
3234 SwitchInstT *SI;
3235 ptrdiff_t Index;
3236
3237 CaseHandleImpl() = default;
3238 CaseHandleImpl(SwitchInstT *SI, ptrdiff_t Index) : SI(SI), Index(Index) {}
3239
3240 public:
3241 /// Resolves case value for current case.
3242 ConstantIntT *getCaseValue() const {
3243 assert((unsigned)Index < SI->getNumCases() &&((void)0)
3244 "Index out the number of cases.")((void)0);
3245 return reinterpret_cast<ConstantIntT *>(SI->getOperand(2 + Index * 2));
3246 }
3247
3248 /// Resolves successor for current case.
3249 BasicBlockT *getCaseSuccessor() const {
3250 assert(((unsigned)Index < SI->getNumCases() ||((void)0)
3251 (unsigned)Index == DefaultPseudoIndex) &&((void)0)
3252 "Index out the number of cases.")((void)0);
3253 return SI->getSuccessor(getSuccessorIndex());
3254 }
3255
3256 /// Returns number of current case.
3257 unsigned getCaseIndex() const { return Index; }
3258
3259 /// Returns successor index for current case successor.
3260 unsigned getSuccessorIndex() const {
3261 assert(((unsigned)Index == DefaultPseudoIndex ||((void)0)
3262 (unsigned)Index < SI->getNumCases()) &&((void)0)
3263 "Index out the number of cases.")((void)0);
3264 return (unsigned)Index != DefaultPseudoIndex ? Index + 1 : 0;
3265 }
3266
3267 bool operator==(const CaseHandleImpl &RHS) const {
3268 assert(SI == RHS.SI && "Incompatible operators.")((void)0);
3269 return Index == RHS.Index;
3270 }
3271 };
3272
3273 using ConstCaseHandle =
3274 CaseHandleImpl<const SwitchInst, const ConstantInt, const BasicBlock>;
3275
3276 class CaseHandle
3277 : public CaseHandleImpl<SwitchInst, ConstantInt, BasicBlock> {
3278 friend class SwitchInst::CaseIteratorImpl<CaseHandle>;
3279
3280 public:
3281 CaseHandle(SwitchInst *SI, ptrdiff_t Index) : CaseHandleImpl(SI, Index) {}
3282
3283 /// Sets the new value for current case.
3284 void setValue(ConstantInt *V) {
3285 assert((unsigned)Index < SI->getNumCases() &&((void)0)
3286 "Index out the number of cases.")((void)0);
3287 SI->setOperand(2 + Index*2, reinterpret_cast<Value*>(V));
3288 }
3289
3290 /// Sets the new successor for current case.
3291 void setSuccessor(BasicBlock *S) {
3292 SI->setSuccessor(getSuccessorIndex(), S);
3293 }
3294 };
3295
3296 template <typename CaseHandleT>
3297 class CaseIteratorImpl
3298 : public iterator_facade_base<CaseIteratorImpl<CaseHandleT>,
3299 std::random_access_iterator_tag,
3300 CaseHandleT> {
3301 using SwitchInstT = typename CaseHandleT::SwitchInstType;
3302
3303 CaseHandleT Case;
3304
3305 public:
3306 /// Default constructed iterator is in an invalid state until assigned to
3307 /// a case for a particular switch.
3308 CaseIteratorImpl() = default;
3309
3310 /// Initializes case iterator for given SwitchInst and for given
3311 /// case number.
3312 CaseIteratorImpl(SwitchInstT *SI, unsigned CaseNum) : Case(SI, CaseNum) {}
3313
3314 /// Initializes case iterator for given SwitchInst and for given
3315 /// successor index.
3316 static CaseIteratorImpl fromSuccessorIndex(SwitchInstT *SI,
3317 unsigned SuccessorIndex) {
3318 assert(SuccessorIndex < SI->getNumSuccessors() &&((void)0)
3319 "Successor index # out of range!")((void)0);
3320 return SuccessorIndex != 0 ? CaseIteratorImpl(SI, SuccessorIndex - 1)
3321 : CaseIteratorImpl(SI, DefaultPseudoIndex);
3322 }
3323
3324 /// Support converting to the const variant. This will be a no-op for const
3325 /// variant.
3326 operator CaseIteratorImpl<ConstCaseHandle>() const {
3327 return CaseIteratorImpl<ConstCaseHandle>(Case.SI, Case.Index);
3328 }
3329
3330 CaseIteratorImpl &operator+=(ptrdiff_t N) {
3331 // Check index correctness after addition.
3332 // Note: Index == getNumCases() means end().
3333 assert(Case.Index + N >= 0 &&((void)0)
3334 (unsigned)(Case.Index + N) <= Case.SI->getNumCases() &&((void)0)
3335 "Case.Index out the number of cases.")((void)0);
3336 Case.Index += N;
3337 return *this;
3338 }
3339 CaseIteratorImpl &operator-=(ptrdiff_t N) {
3340 // Check index correctness after subtraction.
3341 // Note: Case.Index == getNumCases() means end().
3342 assert(Case.Index - N >= 0 &&((void)0)
3343 (unsigned)(Case.Index - N) <= Case.SI->getNumCases() &&((void)0)
3344 "Case.Index out the number of cases.")((void)0);
3345 Case.Index -= N;
3346 return *this;
3347 }
3348 ptrdiff_t operator-(const CaseIteratorImpl &RHS) const {
3349 assert(Case.SI == RHS.Case.SI && "Incompatible operators.")((void)0);
3350 return Case.Index - RHS.Case.Index;
3351 }
3352 bool operator==(const CaseIteratorImpl &RHS) const {
3353 return Case == RHS.Case;
3354 }
3355 bool operator<(const CaseIteratorImpl &RHS) const {
3356 assert(Case.SI == RHS.Case.SI && "Incompatible operators.")((void)0);
3357 return Case.Index < RHS.Case.Index;
3358 }
3359 CaseHandleT &operator*() { return Case; }
3360 const CaseHandleT &operator*() const { return Case; }
3361 };
3362
3363 using CaseIt = CaseIteratorImpl<CaseHandle>;
3364 using ConstCaseIt = CaseIteratorImpl<ConstCaseHandle>;
3365
3366 static SwitchInst *Create(Value *Value, BasicBlock *Default,
3367 unsigned NumCases,
3368 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
3369 return new SwitchInst(Value, Default, NumCases, InsertBefore);
3370 }
3371
3372 static SwitchInst *Create(Value *Value, BasicBlock *Default,
3373 unsigned NumCases, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
3374 return new SwitchInst(Value, Default, NumCases, InsertAtEnd);
3375 }
3376
3377 /// Provide fast operand accessors
3378 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
3379
3380 // Accessor Methods for Switch stmt
3381 Value *getCondition() const { return getOperand(0); }
3382 void setCondition(Value *V) { setOperand(0, V); }
3383
3384 BasicBlock *getDefaultDest() const {
3385 return cast<BasicBlock>(getOperand(1));
3386 }
3387
3388 void setDefaultDest(BasicBlock *DefaultCase) {
3389 setOperand(1, reinterpret_cast<Value*>(DefaultCase));
3390 }
3391
3392 /// Return the number of 'cases' in this switch instruction, excluding the
3393 /// default case.
3394 unsigned getNumCases() const {
3395 return getNumOperands()/2 - 1;
3396 }
3397
3398 /// Returns a read/write iterator that points to the first case in the
3399 /// SwitchInst.
3400 CaseIt case_begin() {
3401 return CaseIt(this, 0);
3402 }
3403
3404 /// Returns a read-only iterator that points to the first case in the
3405 /// SwitchInst.
3406 ConstCaseIt case_begin() const {
3407 return ConstCaseIt(this, 0);
3408 }
3409
3410 /// Returns a read/write iterator that points one past the last in the
3411 /// SwitchInst.
3412 CaseIt case_end() {
3413 return CaseIt(this, getNumCases());
3414 }
3415
3416 /// Returns a read-only iterator that points one past the last in the
3417 /// SwitchInst.
3418 ConstCaseIt case_end() const {
3419 return ConstCaseIt(this, getNumCases());
3420 }
3421
3422 /// Iteration adapter for range-for loops.
3423 iterator_range<CaseIt> cases() {
3424 return make_range(case_begin(), case_end());
3425 }
3426
3427 /// Constant iteration adapter for range-for loops.
3428 iterator_range<ConstCaseIt> cases() const {
3429 return make_range(case_begin(), case_end());
3430 }
3431
3432 /// Returns an iterator that points to the default case.
3433 /// Note: this iterator allows to resolve successor only. Attempt
3434 /// to resolve case value causes an assertion.
3435 /// Also note, that increment and decrement also causes an assertion and
3436 /// makes iterator invalid.
3437 CaseIt case_default() {
3438 return CaseIt(this, DefaultPseudoIndex);
3439 }
3440 ConstCaseIt case_default() const {
3441 return ConstCaseIt(this, DefaultPseudoIndex);
3442 }
3443
3444 /// Search all of the case values for the specified constant. If it is
3445 /// explicitly handled, return the case iterator of it, otherwise return
3446 /// default case iterator to indicate that it is handled by the default
3447 /// handler.
3448 CaseIt findCaseValue(const ConstantInt *C) {
3449 CaseIt I = llvm::find_if(
3450 cases(), [C](CaseHandle &Case) { return Case.getCaseValue() == C; });
3451 if (I != case_end())
3452 return I;
3453
3454 return case_default();
3455 }
3456 ConstCaseIt findCaseValue(const ConstantInt *C) const {
3457 ConstCaseIt I = llvm::find_if(cases(), [C](ConstCaseHandle &Case) {
3458 return Case.getCaseValue() == C;
3459 });
3460 if (I != case_end())
3461 return I;
3462
3463 return case_default();
3464 }
3465
3466 /// Finds the unique case value for a given successor. Returns null if the
3467 /// successor is not found, not unique, or is the default case.
3468 ConstantInt *findCaseDest(BasicBlock *BB) {
3469 if (BB == getDefaultDest())
3470 return nullptr;
3471
3472 ConstantInt *CI = nullptr;
3473 for (auto Case : cases()) {
3474 if (Case.getCaseSuccessor() != BB)
3475 continue;
3476
3477 if (CI)
3478 return nullptr; // Multiple cases lead to BB.
3479
3480 CI = Case.getCaseValue();
3481 }
3482
3483 return CI;
3484 }
3485
3486 /// Add an entry to the switch instruction.
3487 /// Note:
3488 /// This action invalidates case_end(). Old case_end() iterator will
3489 /// point to the added case.
3490 void addCase(ConstantInt *OnVal, BasicBlock *Dest);
3491
3492 /// This method removes the specified case and its successor from the switch
3493 /// instruction. Note that this operation may reorder the remaining cases at
3494 /// index idx and above.
3495 /// Note:
3496 /// This action invalidates iterators for all cases following the one removed,
3497 /// including the case_end() iterator. It returns an iterator for the next
3498 /// case.
3499 CaseIt removeCase(CaseIt I);
3500
3501 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return getNumOperands()/2; }
3502 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned idx) const {
3503 assert(idx < getNumSuccessors() &&"Successor idx out of range for switch!")((void)0);
3504 return cast<BasicBlock>(getOperand(idx*2+1));
3505 }
3506 void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *NewSucc) {
3507 assert(idx < getNumSuccessors() && "Successor # out of range for switch!")((void)0);
3508 setOperand(idx * 2 + 1, NewSucc);
3509 }
3510
3511 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
3512 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
3513 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Switch;
3514 }
3515 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
3516 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
3517 }
3518};
3519
3520/// A wrapper class to simplify modification of SwitchInst cases along with
3521/// their prof branch_weights metadata.
3522class SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper {
3523 SwitchInst &SI;
3524 Optional<SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> > Weights = None;
3525 bool Changed = false;
3526
3527protected:
3528 static MDNode *getProfBranchWeightsMD(const SwitchInst &SI);
3529
3530 MDNode *buildProfBranchWeightsMD();
3531
3532 void init();
3533
3534public:
3535 using CaseWeightOpt = Optional<uint32_t>;
3536 SwitchInst *operator->() { return &SI; }
3537 SwitchInst &operator*() { return SI; }
3538 operator SwitchInst *() { return &SI; }
3539
3540 SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper(SwitchInst &SI) : SI(SI) { init(); }
3541
3542 ~SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper() {
3543 if (Changed)
3544 SI.setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, buildProfBranchWeightsMD());
3545 }
3546
3547 /// Delegate the call to the underlying SwitchInst::removeCase() and remove
3548 /// correspondent branch weight.
3549 SwitchInst::CaseIt removeCase(SwitchInst::CaseIt I);
3550
3551 /// Delegate the call to the underlying SwitchInst::addCase() and set the
3552 /// specified branch weight for the added case.
3553 void addCase(ConstantInt *OnVal, BasicBlock *Dest, CaseWeightOpt W);
3554
3555 /// Delegate the call to the underlying SwitchInst::eraseFromParent() and mark
3556 /// this object to not touch the underlying SwitchInst in destructor.
3557 SymbolTableList<Instruction>::iterator eraseFromParent();
3558
3559 void setSuccessorWeight(unsigned idx, CaseWeightOpt W);
3560 CaseWeightOpt getSuccessorWeight(unsigned idx);
3561
3562 static CaseWeightOpt getSuccessorWeight(const SwitchInst &SI, unsigned idx);
3563};
3564
3565template <>
3566struct OperandTraits<SwitchInst> : public HungoffOperandTraits<2> {
3567};
3568
3569DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(SwitchInst, Value)SwitchInst::op_iterator SwitchInst::op_begin() { return OperandTraits
<SwitchInst>::op_begin(this); } SwitchInst::const_op_iterator
SwitchInst::op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<SwitchInst
>::op_begin(const_cast<SwitchInst*>(this)); } SwitchInst
::op_iterator SwitchInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits<
SwitchInst>::op_end(this); } SwitchInst::const_op_iterator
SwitchInst::op_end() const { return OperandTraits<SwitchInst
>::op_end(const_cast<SwitchInst*>(this)); } Value *SwitchInst
::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<SwitchInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<SwitchInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void SwitchInst
::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture) { ((
void)0); OperandTraits<SwitchInst>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture
] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned SwitchInst::getNumOperands() const
{ return OperandTraits<SwitchInst>::operands(this); } template
<int Idx_nocapture> Use &SwitchInst::Op() { return
this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int
Idx_nocapture> const Use &SwitchInst::Op() const { return
this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
3570
3571//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3572// IndirectBrInst Class
3573//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3574
3575//===---------------------------------------------------------------------------
3576/// Indirect Branch Instruction.
3577///
3578class IndirectBrInst : public Instruction {
3579 unsigned ReservedSpace;
3580
3581 // Operand[0] = Address to jump to
3582 // Operand[n+1] = n-th destination
3583 IndirectBrInst(const IndirectBrInst &IBI);
3584
3585 /// Create a new indirectbr instruction, specifying an
3586 /// Address to jump to. The number of expected destinations can be specified
3587 /// here to make memory allocation more efficient. This constructor can also
3588 /// autoinsert before another instruction.
3589 IndirectBrInst(Value *Address, unsigned NumDests, Instruction *InsertBefore);
3590
3591 /// Create a new indirectbr instruction, specifying an
3592 /// Address to jump to. The number of expected destinations can be specified
3593 /// here to make memory allocation more efficient. This constructor also
3594 /// autoinserts at the end of the specified BasicBlock.
3595 IndirectBrInst(Value *Address, unsigned NumDests, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
3596
3597 // allocate space for exactly zero operands
3598 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S); }
3599
3600 void init(Value *Address, unsigned NumDests);
3601 void growOperands();
3602
3603protected:
3604 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
3605 friend class Instruction;
3606
3607 IndirectBrInst *cloneImpl() const;
3608
3609public:
3610 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); }
3611
3612 /// Iterator type that casts an operand to a basic block.
3613 ///
3614 /// This only makes sense because the successors are stored as adjacent
3615 /// operands for indirectbr instructions.
3616 struct succ_op_iterator
3617 : iterator_adaptor_base<succ_op_iterator, value_op_iterator,
3618 std::random_access_iterator_tag, BasicBlock *,
3619 ptrdiff_t, BasicBlock *, BasicBlock *> {
3620 explicit succ_op_iterator(value_op_iterator I) : iterator_adaptor_base(I) {}
3621
3622 BasicBlock *operator*() const { return cast<BasicBlock>(*I); }
3623 BasicBlock *operator->() const { return operator*(); }
3624 };
3625
3626 /// The const version of `succ_op_iterator`.
3627 struct const_succ_op_iterator
3628 : iterator_adaptor_base<const_succ_op_iterator, const_value_op_iterator,
3629 std::random_access_iterator_tag,
3630 const BasicBlock *, ptrdiff_t, const BasicBlock *,
3631 const BasicBlock *> {
3632 explicit const_succ_op_iterator(const_value_op_iterator I)
3633 : iterator_adaptor_base(I) {}
3634
3635 const BasicBlock *operator*() const { return cast<BasicBlock>(*I); }
3636 const BasicBlock *operator->() const { return operator*(); }
3637 };
3638
3639 static IndirectBrInst *Create(Value *Address, unsigned NumDests,
3640 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
3641 return new IndirectBrInst(Address, NumDests, InsertBefore);
3642 }
3643
3644 static IndirectBrInst *Create(Value *Address, unsigned NumDests,
3645 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
3646 return new IndirectBrInst(Address, NumDests, InsertAtEnd);
3647 }
3648
3649 /// Provide fast operand accessors.
3650 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
3651
3652 // Accessor Methods for IndirectBrInst instruction.
3653 Value *getAddress() { return getOperand(0); }
3654 const Value *getAddress() const { return getOperand(0); }
3655 void setAddress(Value *V) { setOperand(0, V); }
3656
3657 /// return the number of possible destinations in this
3658 /// indirectbr instruction.
3659 unsigned getNumDestinations() const { return getNumOperands()-1; }
3660
3661 /// Return the specified destination.
3662 BasicBlock *getDestination(unsigned i) { return getSuccessor(i); }
3663 const BasicBlock *getDestination(unsigned i) const { return getSuccessor(i); }
3664
3665 /// Add a destination.
3666 ///
3667 void addDestination(BasicBlock *Dest);
3668
3669 /// This method removes the specified successor from the
3670 /// indirectbr instruction.
3671 void removeDestination(unsigned i);
3672
3673 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return getNumOperands()-1; }
3674 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned i) const {
3675 return cast<BasicBlock>(getOperand(i+1));
3676 }
3677 void setSuccessor(unsigned i, BasicBlock *NewSucc) {
3678 setOperand(i + 1, NewSucc);
3679 }
3680
3681 iterator_range<succ_op_iterator> successors() {
3682 return make_range(succ_op_iterator(std::next(value_op_begin())),
3683 succ_op_iterator(value_op_end()));
3684 }
3685
3686 iterator_range<const_succ_op_iterator> successors() const {
3687 return make_range(const_succ_op_iterator(std::next(value_op_begin())),
3688 const_succ_op_iterator(value_op_end()));
3689 }
3690
3691 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
3692 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
3693 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::IndirectBr;
3694 }
3695 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
3696 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
3697 }
3698};
3699
3700template <>
3701struct OperandTraits<IndirectBrInst> : public HungoffOperandTraits<1> {
3702};
3703
3704DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(IndirectBrInst, Value)IndirectBrInst::op_iterator IndirectBrInst::op_begin() { return
OperandTraits<IndirectBrInst>::op_begin(this); } IndirectBrInst
::const_op_iterator IndirectBrInst::op_begin() const { return
OperandTraits<IndirectBrInst>::op_begin(const_cast<
IndirectBrInst*>(this)); } IndirectBrInst::op_iterator IndirectBrInst
::op_end() { return OperandTraits<IndirectBrInst>::op_end
(this); } IndirectBrInst::const_op_iterator IndirectBrInst::op_end
() const { return OperandTraits<IndirectBrInst>::op_end
(const_cast<IndirectBrInst*>(this)); } Value *IndirectBrInst
::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<IndirectBrInst>::op_begin(
const_cast<IndirectBrInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get());
} void IndirectBrInst::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value
*Val_nocapture) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<IndirectBrInst
>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned
IndirectBrInst::getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits
<IndirectBrInst>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture
> Use &IndirectBrInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<
Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture>
const Use &IndirectBrInst::Op() const { return this->
OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
3705
3706//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3707// InvokeInst Class
3708//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3709
3710/// Invoke instruction. The SubclassData field is used to hold the
3711/// calling convention of the call.
3712///
3713class InvokeInst : public CallBase {
3714 /// The number of operands for this call beyond the called function,
3715 /// arguments, and operand bundles.
3716 static constexpr int NumExtraOperands = 2;
3717
3718 /// The index from the end of the operand array to the normal destination.
3719 static constexpr int NormalDestOpEndIdx = -3;
3720
3721 /// The index from the end of the operand array to the unwind destination.
3722 static constexpr int UnwindDestOpEndIdx = -2;
3723
3724 InvokeInst(const InvokeInst &BI);
3725
3726 /// Construct an InvokeInst given a range of arguments.
3727 ///
3728 /// Construct an InvokeInst from a range of arguments
3729 inline InvokeInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3730 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3731 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands,
3732 const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore);
3733
3734 inline InvokeInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3735 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3736 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands,
3737 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
3738
3739 void init(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3740 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3741 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr);
3742
3743 /// Compute the number of operands to allocate.
3744 static int ComputeNumOperands(int NumArgs, int NumBundleInputs = 0) {
3745 // We need one operand for the called function, plus our extra operands and
3746 // the input operand counts provided.
3747 return 1 + NumExtraOperands + NumArgs + NumBundleInputs;
3748 }
3749
3750protected:
3751 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
3752 friend class Instruction;
3753
3754 InvokeInst *cloneImpl() const;
3755
3756public:
3757 static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3758 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3759 const Twine &NameStr,
3760 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
3761 int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size());
3762 return new (NumOperands)
3763 InvokeInst(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, None, NumOperands,
3764 NameStr, InsertBefore);
3765 }
3766
3767 static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3768 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3769 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = None,
3770 const Twine &NameStr = "",
3771 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
3772 int NumOperands =
3773 ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), CountBundleInputs(Bundles));
3774 unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo);
3775
3776 return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes)
3777 InvokeInst(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, Bundles, NumOperands,
3778 NameStr, InsertBefore);
3779 }
3780
3781 static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3782 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3783 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
3784 int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size());
3785 return new (NumOperands)
3786 InvokeInst(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, None, NumOperands,
3787 NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
3788 }
3789
3790 static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3791 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3792 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
3793 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
3794 int NumOperands =
3795 ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), CountBundleInputs(Bundles));
3796 unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo);
3797
3798 return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes)
3799 InvokeInst(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, Bundles, NumOperands,
3800 NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
3801 }
3802
3803 static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3804 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3805 const Twine &NameStr,
3806 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
3807 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), IfNormal,
3808 IfException, Args, None, NameStr, InsertBefore);
3809 }
3810
3811 static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3812 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3813 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = None,
3814 const Twine &NameStr = "",
3815 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
3816 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), IfNormal,
3817 IfException, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertBefore);
3818 }
3819
3820 static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3821 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3822 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
3823 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), IfNormal,
3824 IfException, Args, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
3825 }
3826
3827 static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3828 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3829 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
3830 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
3831 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), IfNormal,
3832 IfException, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
3833 }
3834
3835 /// Create a clone of \p II with a different set of operand bundles and
3836 /// insert it before \p InsertPt.
3837 ///
3838 /// The returned invoke instruction is identical to \p II in every way except
3839 /// that the operand bundles for the new instruction are set to the operand
3840 /// bundles in \p Bundles.
3841 static InvokeInst *Create(InvokeInst *II, ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
3842 Instruction *InsertPt = nullptr);
3843
3844 // get*Dest - Return the destination basic blocks...
3845 BasicBlock *getNormalDest() const {
3846 return cast<BasicBlock>(Op<NormalDestOpEndIdx>());
3847 }
3848 BasicBlock *getUnwindDest() const {
3849 return cast<BasicBlock>(Op<UnwindDestOpEndIdx>());
11
Calling 'cast<llvm::BasicBlock, llvm::Use>'
22
Returning from 'cast<llvm::BasicBlock, llvm::Use>'
23
Returning pointer
3850 }
3851 void setNormalDest(BasicBlock *B) {
3852 Op<NormalDestOpEndIdx>() = reinterpret_cast<Value *>(B);
3853 }
3854 void setUnwindDest(BasicBlock *B) {
3855 Op<UnwindDestOpEndIdx>() = reinterpret_cast<Value *>(B);
3856 }
3857
3858 /// Get the landingpad instruction from the landing pad
3859 /// block (the unwind destination).
3860 LandingPadInst *getLandingPadInst() const;
3861
3862 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned i) const {
3863 assert(i < 2 && "Successor # out of range for invoke!")((void)0);
3864 return i == 0 ? getNormalDest() : getUnwindDest();
3865 }
3866
3867 void setSuccessor(unsigned i, BasicBlock *NewSucc) {
3868 assert(i < 2 && "Successor # out of range for invoke!")((void)0);
3869 if (i == 0)
3870 setNormalDest(NewSucc);
3871 else
3872 setUnwindDest(NewSucc);
3873 }
3874
3875 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 2; }
3876
3877 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
3878 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
3879 return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Invoke);
3880 }
3881 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
3882 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
3883 }
3884
3885private:
3886 // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding
3887 // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
3888 template <typename Bitfield>
3889 void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) {
3890 Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value);
3891 }
3892};
3893
3894InvokeInst::InvokeInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3895 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3896 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands,
3897 const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore)
3898 : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::Invoke,
3899 OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) - NumOperands, NumOperands,
3900 InsertBefore) {
3901 init(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, Bundles, NameStr);
3902}
3903
3904InvokeInst::InvokeInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal,
3905 BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3906 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands,
3907 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
3908 : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::Invoke,
3909 OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) - NumOperands, NumOperands,
3910 InsertAtEnd) {
3911 init(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, Bundles, NameStr);
3912}
3913
3914//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3915// CallBrInst Class
3916//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3917
3918/// CallBr instruction, tracking function calls that may not return control but
3919/// instead transfer it to a third location. The SubclassData field is used to
3920/// hold the calling convention of the call.
3921///
3922class CallBrInst : public CallBase {
3923
3924 unsigned NumIndirectDests;
3925
3926 CallBrInst(const CallBrInst &BI);
3927
3928 /// Construct a CallBrInst given a range of arguments.
3929 ///
3930 /// Construct a CallBrInst from a range of arguments
3931 inline CallBrInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
3932 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
3933 ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3934 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands,
3935 const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore);
3936
3937 inline CallBrInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
3938 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
3939 ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3940 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands,
3941 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
3942
3943 void init(FunctionType *FTy, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
3944 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3945 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr);
3946
3947 /// Should the Indirect Destinations change, scan + update the Arg list.
3948 void updateArgBlockAddresses(unsigned i, BasicBlock *B);
3949
3950 /// Compute the number of operands to allocate.
3951 static int ComputeNumOperands(int NumArgs, int NumIndirectDests,
3952 int NumBundleInputs = 0) {
3953 // We need one operand for the called function, plus our extra operands and
3954 // the input operand counts provided.
3955 return 2 + NumIndirectDests + NumArgs + NumBundleInputs;
3956 }
3957
3958protected:
3959 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
3960 friend class Instruction;
3961
3962 CallBrInst *cloneImpl() const;
3963
3964public:
3965 static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func,
3966 BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
3967 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
3968 ArrayRef<Value *> Args, const Twine &NameStr,
3969 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
3970 int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), IndirectDests.size());
3971 return new (NumOperands)
3972 CallBrInst(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, None,
3973 NumOperands, NameStr, InsertBefore);
3974 }
3975
3976 static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func,
3977 BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
3978 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
3979 ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
3980 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = None,
3981 const Twine &NameStr = "",
3982 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
3983 int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), IndirectDests.size(),
3984 CountBundleInputs(Bundles));
3985 unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo);
3986
3987 return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes)
3988 CallBrInst(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, Bundles,
3989 NumOperands, NameStr, InsertBefore);
3990 }
3991
3992 static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func,
3993 BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
3994 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
3995 ArrayRef<Value *> Args, const Twine &NameStr,
3996 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
3997 int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), IndirectDests.size());
3998 return new (NumOperands)
3999 CallBrInst(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, None,
4000 NumOperands, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
4001 }
4002
4003 static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func,
4004 BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
4005 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
4006 ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4007 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
4008 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
4009 int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), IndirectDests.size(),
4010 CountBundleInputs(Bundles));
4011 unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo);
4012
4013 return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes)
4014 CallBrInst(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, Bundles,
4015 NumOperands, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
4016 }
4017
4018 static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
4019 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
4020 ArrayRef<Value *> Args, const Twine &NameStr,
4021 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
4022 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), DefaultDest,
4023 IndirectDests, Args, NameStr, InsertBefore);
4024 }
4025
4026 static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
4027 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
4028 ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4029 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = None,
4030 const Twine &NameStr = "",
4031 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
4032 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), DefaultDest,
4033 IndirectDests, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertBefore);
4034 }
4035
4036 static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
4037 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
4038 ArrayRef<Value *> Args, const Twine &NameStr,
4039 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
4040 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), DefaultDest,
4041 IndirectDests, Args, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
4042 }
4043
4044 static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func,
4045 BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
4046 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
4047 ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4048 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
4049 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
4050 return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), DefaultDest,
4051 IndirectDests, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
4052 }
4053
4054 /// Create a clone of \p CBI with a different set of operand bundles and
4055 /// insert it before \p InsertPt.
4056 ///
4057 /// The returned callbr instruction is identical to \p CBI in every way
4058 /// except that the operand bundles for the new instruction are set to the
4059 /// operand bundles in \p Bundles.
4060 static CallBrInst *Create(CallBrInst *CBI,
4061 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles,
4062 Instruction *InsertPt = nullptr);
4063
4064 /// Return the number of callbr indirect dest labels.
4065 ///
4066 unsigned getNumIndirectDests() const { return NumIndirectDests; }
4067
4068 /// getIndirectDestLabel - Return the i-th indirect dest label.
4069 ///
4070 Value *getIndirectDestLabel(unsigned i) const {
4071 assert(i < getNumIndirectDests() && "Out of bounds!")((void)0);
4072 return getOperand(i + getNumArgOperands() + getNumTotalBundleOperands() +
4073 1);
4074 }
4075
4076 Value *getIndirectDestLabelUse(unsigned i) const {
4077 assert(i < getNumIndirectDests() && "Out of bounds!")((void)0);
4078 return getOperandUse(i + getNumArgOperands() + getNumTotalBundleOperands() +
4079 1);
4080 }
4081
4082 // Return the destination basic blocks...
4083 BasicBlock *getDefaultDest() const {
4084 return cast<BasicBlock>(*(&Op<-1>() - getNumIndirectDests() - 1));
4085 }
4086 BasicBlock *getIndirectDest(unsigned i) const {
4087 return cast_or_null<BasicBlock>(*(&Op<-1>() - getNumIndirectDests() + i));
4088 }
4089 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> getIndirectDests() const {
4090 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> IndirectDests;
4091 for (unsigned i = 0, e = getNumIndirectDests(); i < e; ++i)
4092 IndirectDests.push_back(getIndirectDest(i));
4093 return IndirectDests;
4094 }
4095 void setDefaultDest(BasicBlock *B) {
4096 *(&Op<-1>() - getNumIndirectDests() - 1) = reinterpret_cast<Value *>(B);
4097 }
4098 void setIndirectDest(unsigned i, BasicBlock *B) {
4099 updateArgBlockAddresses(i, B);
4100 *(&Op<-1>() - getNumIndirectDests() + i) = reinterpret_cast<Value *>(B);
4101 }
4102
4103 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned i) const {
4104 assert(i < getNumSuccessors() + 1 &&((void)0)
4105 "Successor # out of range for callbr!")((void)0);
4106 return i == 0 ? getDefaultDest() : getIndirectDest(i - 1);
4107 }
4108
4109 void setSuccessor(unsigned i, BasicBlock *NewSucc) {
4110 assert(i < getNumIndirectDests() + 1 &&((void)0)
4111 "Successor # out of range for callbr!")((void)0);
4112 return i == 0 ? setDefaultDest(NewSucc) : setIndirectDest(i - 1, NewSucc);
4113 }
4114
4115 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return getNumIndirectDests() + 1; }
4116
4117 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4118 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4119 return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CallBr);
4120 }
4121 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4122 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4123 }
4124
4125private:
4126 // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding
4127 // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
4128 template <typename Bitfield>
4129 void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) {
4130 Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value);
4131 }
4132};
4133
4134CallBrInst::CallBrInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
4135 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
4136 ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4137 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands,
4138 const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore)
4139 : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::CallBr,
4140 OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) - NumOperands, NumOperands,
4141 InsertBefore) {
4142 init(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, Bundles, NameStr);
4143}
4144
4145CallBrInst::CallBrInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest,
4146 ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests,
4147 ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4148 ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands,
4149 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
4150 : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::CallBr,
4151 OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) - NumOperands, NumOperands,
4152 InsertAtEnd) {
4153 init(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, Bundles, NameStr);
4154}
4155
4156//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4157// ResumeInst Class
4158//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4159
4160//===---------------------------------------------------------------------------
4161/// Resume the propagation of an exception.
4162///
4163class ResumeInst : public Instruction {
4164 ResumeInst(const ResumeInst &RI);
4165
4166 explicit ResumeInst(Value *Exn, Instruction *InsertBefore=nullptr);
4167 ResumeInst(Value *Exn, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
4168
4169protected:
4170 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4171 friend class Instruction;
4172
4173 ResumeInst *cloneImpl() const;
4174
4175public:
4176 static ResumeInst *Create(Value *Exn, Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
4177 return new(1) ResumeInst(Exn, InsertBefore);
4178 }
4179
4180 static ResumeInst *Create(Value *Exn, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
4181 return new(1) ResumeInst(Exn, InsertAtEnd);
4182 }
4183
4184 /// Provide fast operand accessors
4185 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
4186
4187 /// Convenience accessor.
4188 Value *getValue() const { return Op<0>(); }
4189
4190 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 0; }
4191
4192 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4193 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4194 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Resume;
4195 }
4196 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4197 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4198 }
4199
4200private:
4201 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned idx) const {
4202 llvm_unreachable("ResumeInst has no successors!")__builtin_unreachable();
4203 }
4204
4205 void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *NewSucc) {
4206 llvm_unreachable("ResumeInst has no successors!")__builtin_unreachable();
4207 }
4208};
4209
4210template <>
4211struct OperandTraits<ResumeInst> :
4212 public FixedNumOperandTraits<ResumeInst, 1> {
4213};
4214
4215DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(ResumeInst, Value)ResumeInst::op_iterator ResumeInst::op_begin() { return OperandTraits
<ResumeInst>::op_begin(this); } ResumeInst::const_op_iterator
ResumeInst::op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<ResumeInst
>::op_begin(const_cast<ResumeInst*>(this)); } ResumeInst
::op_iterator ResumeInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits<
ResumeInst>::op_end(this); } ResumeInst::const_op_iterator
ResumeInst::op_end() const { return OperandTraits<ResumeInst
>::op_end(const_cast<ResumeInst*>(this)); } Value *ResumeInst
::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<ResumeInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<ResumeInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void ResumeInst
::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture) { ((
void)0); OperandTraits<ResumeInst>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture
] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned ResumeInst::getNumOperands() const
{ return OperandTraits<ResumeInst>::operands(this); } template
<int Idx_nocapture> Use &ResumeInst::Op() { return
this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int
Idx_nocapture> const Use &ResumeInst::Op() const { return
this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
4216
4217//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4218// CatchSwitchInst Class
4219//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4220class CatchSwitchInst : public Instruction {
4221 using UnwindDestField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>;
4222
4223 /// The number of operands actually allocated. NumOperands is
4224 /// the number actually in use.
4225 unsigned ReservedSpace;
4226
4227 // Operand[0] = Outer scope
4228 // Operand[1] = Unwind block destination
4229 // Operand[n] = BasicBlock to go to on match
4230 CatchSwitchInst(const CatchSwitchInst &CSI);
4231
4232 /// Create a new switch instruction, specifying a
4233 /// default destination. The number of additional handlers can be specified
4234 /// here to make memory allocation more efficient.
4235 /// This constructor can also autoinsert before another instruction.
4236 CatchSwitchInst(Value *ParentPad, BasicBlock *UnwindDest,
4237 unsigned NumHandlers, const Twine &NameStr,
4238 Instruction *InsertBefore);
4239
4240 /// Create a new switch instruction, specifying a
4241 /// default destination. The number of additional handlers can be specified
4242 /// here to make memory allocation more efficient.
4243 /// This constructor also autoinserts at the end of the specified BasicBlock.
4244 CatchSwitchInst(Value *ParentPad, BasicBlock *UnwindDest,
4245 unsigned NumHandlers, const Twine &NameStr,
4246 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
4247
4248 // allocate space for exactly zero operands
4249 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S); }
4250
4251 void init(Value *ParentPad, BasicBlock *UnwindDest, unsigned NumReserved);
4252 void growOperands(unsigned Size);
4253
4254protected:
4255 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4256 friend class Instruction;
4257
4258 CatchSwitchInst *cloneImpl() const;
4259
4260public:
4261 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { return User::operator delete(Ptr); }
4262
4263 static CatchSwitchInst *Create(Value *ParentPad, BasicBlock *UnwindDest,
4264 unsigned NumHandlers,
4265 const Twine &NameStr = "",
4266 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
4267 return new CatchSwitchInst(ParentPad, UnwindDest, NumHandlers, NameStr,
4268 InsertBefore);
4269 }
4270
4271 static CatchSwitchInst *Create(Value *ParentPad, BasicBlock *UnwindDest,
4272 unsigned NumHandlers, const Twine &NameStr,
4273 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
4274 return new CatchSwitchInst(ParentPad, UnwindDest, NumHandlers, NameStr,
4275 InsertAtEnd);
4276 }
4277
4278 /// Provide fast operand accessors
4279 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
4280
4281 // Accessor Methods for CatchSwitch stmt
4282 Value *getParentPad() const { return getOperand(0); }
4283 void setParentPad(Value *ParentPad) { setOperand(0, ParentPad); }
4284
4285 // Accessor Methods for CatchSwitch stmt
4286 bool hasUnwindDest() const { return getSubclassData<UnwindDestField>(); }
4287 bool unwindsToCaller() const { return !hasUnwindDest(); }
4288 BasicBlock *getUnwindDest() const {
4289 if (hasUnwindDest())
4290 return cast<BasicBlock>(getOperand(1));
4291 return nullptr;
4292 }
4293 void setUnwindDest(BasicBlock *UnwindDest) {
4294 assert(UnwindDest)((void)0);
4295 assert(hasUnwindDest())((void)0);
4296 setOperand(1, UnwindDest);
4297 }
4298
4299 /// return the number of 'handlers' in this catchswitch
4300 /// instruction, except the default handler
4301 unsigned getNumHandlers() const {
4302 if (hasUnwindDest())
4303 return getNumOperands() - 2;
4304 return getNumOperands() - 1;
4305 }
4306
4307private:
4308 static BasicBlock *handler_helper(Value *V) { return cast<BasicBlock>(V); }
4309 static const BasicBlock *handler_helper(const Value *V) {
4310 return cast<BasicBlock>(V);
4311 }
4312
4313public:
4314 using DerefFnTy = BasicBlock *(*)(Value *);
4315 using handler_iterator = mapped_iterator<op_iterator, DerefFnTy>;
4316 using handler_range = iterator_range<handler_iterator>;
4317 using ConstDerefFnTy = const BasicBlock *(*)(const Value *);
4318 using const_handler_iterator =
4319 mapped_iterator<const_op_iterator, ConstDerefFnTy>;
4320 using const_handler_range = iterator_range<const_handler_iterator>;
4321
4322 /// Returns an iterator that points to the first handler in CatchSwitchInst.
4323 handler_iterator handler_begin() {
4324 op_iterator It = op_begin() + 1;
4325 if (hasUnwindDest())
4326 ++It;
4327 return handler_iterator(It, DerefFnTy(handler_helper));
4328 }
4329
4330 /// Returns an iterator that points to the first handler in the
4331 /// CatchSwitchInst.
4332 const_handler_iterator handler_begin() const {
4333 const_op_iterator It = op_begin() + 1;
4334 if (hasUnwindDest())
4335 ++It;
4336 return const_handler_iterator(It, ConstDerefFnTy(handler_helper));
4337 }
4338
4339 /// Returns a read-only iterator that points one past the last
4340 /// handler in the CatchSwitchInst.
4341 handler_iterator handler_end() {
4342 return handler_iterator(op_end(), DerefFnTy(handler_helper));
4343 }
4344
4345 /// Returns an iterator that points one past the last handler in the
4346 /// CatchSwitchInst.
4347 const_handler_iterator handler_end() const {
4348 return const_handler_iterator(op_end(), ConstDerefFnTy(handler_helper));
4349 }
4350
4351 /// iteration adapter for range-for loops.
4352 handler_range handlers() {
4353 return make_range(handler_begin(), handler_end());
4354 }
4355
4356 /// iteration adapter for range-for loops.
4357 const_handler_range handlers() const {
4358 return make_range(handler_begin(), handler_end());
4359 }
4360
4361 /// Add an entry to the switch instruction...
4362 /// Note:
4363 /// This action invalidates handler_end(). Old handler_end() iterator will
4364 /// point to the added handler.
4365 void addHandler(BasicBlock *Dest);
4366
4367 void removeHandler(handler_iterator HI);
4368
4369 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return getNumOperands() - 1; }
4370 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned Idx) const {
4371 assert(Idx < getNumSuccessors() &&((void)0)
4372 "Successor # out of range for catchswitch!")((void)0);
4373 return cast<BasicBlock>(getOperand(Idx + 1));
4374 }
4375 void setSuccessor(unsigned Idx, BasicBlock *NewSucc) {
4376 assert(Idx < getNumSuccessors() &&((void)0)
4377 "Successor # out of range for catchswitch!")((void)0);
4378 setOperand(Idx + 1, NewSucc);
4379 }
4380
4381 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4382 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4383 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CatchSwitch;
4384 }
4385 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4386 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4387 }
4388};
4389
4390template <>
4391struct OperandTraits<CatchSwitchInst> : public HungoffOperandTraits<2> {};
4392
4393DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(CatchSwitchInst, Value)CatchSwitchInst::op_iterator CatchSwitchInst::op_begin() { return
OperandTraits<CatchSwitchInst>::op_begin(this); } CatchSwitchInst
::const_op_iterator CatchSwitchInst::op_begin() const { return
OperandTraits<CatchSwitchInst>::op_begin(const_cast<
CatchSwitchInst*>(this)); } CatchSwitchInst::op_iterator CatchSwitchInst
::op_end() { return OperandTraits<CatchSwitchInst>::op_end
(this); } CatchSwitchInst::const_op_iterator CatchSwitchInst::
op_end() const { return OperandTraits<CatchSwitchInst>::
op_end(const_cast<CatchSwitchInst*>(this)); } Value *CatchSwitchInst
::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<CatchSwitchInst>::op_begin
(const_cast<CatchSwitchInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()
); } void CatchSwitchInst::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value
*Val_nocapture) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<CatchSwitchInst
>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned
CatchSwitchInst::getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits
<CatchSwitchInst>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture
> Use &CatchSwitchInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<
Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture>
const Use &CatchSwitchInst::Op() const { return this->
OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
4394
4395//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4396// CleanupPadInst Class
4397//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4398class CleanupPadInst : public FuncletPadInst {
4399private:
4400 explicit CleanupPadInst(Value *ParentPad, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4401 unsigned Values, const Twine &NameStr,
4402 Instruction *InsertBefore)
4403 : FuncletPadInst(Instruction::CleanupPad, ParentPad, Args, Values,
4404 NameStr, InsertBefore) {}
4405 explicit CleanupPadInst(Value *ParentPad, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4406 unsigned Values, const Twine &NameStr,
4407 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
4408 : FuncletPadInst(Instruction::CleanupPad, ParentPad, Args, Values,
4409 NameStr, InsertAtEnd) {}
4410
4411public:
4412 static CleanupPadInst *Create(Value *ParentPad, ArrayRef<Value *> Args = None,
4413 const Twine &NameStr = "",
4414 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
4415 unsigned Values = 1 + Args.size();
4416 return new (Values)
4417 CleanupPadInst(ParentPad, Args, Values, NameStr, InsertBefore);
4418 }
4419
4420 static CleanupPadInst *Create(Value *ParentPad, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4421 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
4422 unsigned Values = 1 + Args.size();
4423 return new (Values)
4424 CleanupPadInst(ParentPad, Args, Values, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
4425 }
4426
4427 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4428 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4429 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CleanupPad;
4430 }
4431 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4432 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4433 }
4434};
4435
4436//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4437// CatchPadInst Class
4438//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4439class CatchPadInst : public FuncletPadInst {
4440private:
4441 explicit CatchPadInst(Value *CatchSwitch, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4442 unsigned Values, const Twine &NameStr,
4443 Instruction *InsertBefore)
4444 : FuncletPadInst(Instruction::CatchPad, CatchSwitch, Args, Values,
4445 NameStr, InsertBefore) {}
4446 explicit CatchPadInst(Value *CatchSwitch, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4447 unsigned Values, const Twine &NameStr,
4448 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
4449 : FuncletPadInst(Instruction::CatchPad, CatchSwitch, Args, Values,
4450 NameStr, InsertAtEnd) {}
4451
4452public:
4453 static CatchPadInst *Create(Value *CatchSwitch, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4454 const Twine &NameStr = "",
4455 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
4456 unsigned Values = 1 + Args.size();
4457 return new (Values)
4458 CatchPadInst(CatchSwitch, Args, Values, NameStr, InsertBefore);
4459 }
4460
4461 static CatchPadInst *Create(Value *CatchSwitch, ArrayRef<Value *> Args,
4462 const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
4463 unsigned Values = 1 + Args.size();
4464 return new (Values)
4465 CatchPadInst(CatchSwitch, Args, Values, NameStr, InsertAtEnd);
4466 }
4467
4468 /// Convenience accessors
4469 CatchSwitchInst *getCatchSwitch() const {
4470 return cast<CatchSwitchInst>(Op<-1>());
4471 }
4472 void setCatchSwitch(Value *CatchSwitch) {
4473 assert(CatchSwitch)((void)0);
4474 Op<-1>() = CatchSwitch;
4475 }
4476
4477 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4478 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4479 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CatchPad;
4480 }
4481 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4482 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4483 }
4484};
4485
4486//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4487// CatchReturnInst Class
4488//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4489
4490class CatchReturnInst : public Instruction {
4491 CatchReturnInst(const CatchReturnInst &RI);
4492 CatchReturnInst(Value *CatchPad, BasicBlock *BB, Instruction *InsertBefore);
4493 CatchReturnInst(Value *CatchPad, BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
4494
4495 void init(Value *CatchPad, BasicBlock *BB);
4496
4497protected:
4498 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4499 friend class Instruction;
4500
4501 CatchReturnInst *cloneImpl() const;
4502
4503public:
4504 static CatchReturnInst *Create(Value *CatchPad, BasicBlock *BB,
4505 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
4506 assert(CatchPad)((void)0);
4507 assert(BB)((void)0);
4508 return new (2) CatchReturnInst(CatchPad, BB, InsertBefore);
4509 }
4510
4511 static CatchReturnInst *Create(Value *CatchPad, BasicBlock *BB,
4512 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
4513 assert(CatchPad)((void)0);
4514 assert(BB)((void)0);
4515 return new (2) CatchReturnInst(CatchPad, BB, InsertAtEnd);
4516 }
4517
4518 /// Provide fast operand accessors
4519 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
4520
4521 /// Convenience accessors.
4522 CatchPadInst *getCatchPad() const { return cast<CatchPadInst>(Op<0>()); }
4523 void setCatchPad(CatchPadInst *CatchPad) {
4524 assert(CatchPad)((void)0);
4525 Op<0>() = CatchPad;
4526 }
4527
4528 BasicBlock *getSuccessor() const { return cast<BasicBlock>(Op<1>()); }
4529 void setSuccessor(BasicBlock *NewSucc) {
4530 assert(NewSucc)((void)0);
4531 Op<1>() = NewSucc;
4532 }
4533 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 1; }
4534
4535 /// Get the parentPad of this catchret's catchpad's catchswitch.
4536 /// The successor block is implicitly a member of this funclet.
4537 Value *getCatchSwitchParentPad() const {
4538 return getCatchPad()->getCatchSwitch()->getParentPad();
4539 }
4540
4541 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4542 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4543 return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CatchRet);
4544 }
4545 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4546 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4547 }
4548
4549private:
4550 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned Idx) const {
4551 assert(Idx < getNumSuccessors() && "Successor # out of range for catchret!")((void)0);
4552 return getSuccessor();
4553 }
4554
4555 void setSuccessor(unsigned Idx, BasicBlock *B) {
4556 assert(Idx < getNumSuccessors() && "Successor # out of range for catchret!")((void)0);
4557 setSuccessor(B);
4558 }
4559};
4560
4561template <>
4562struct OperandTraits<CatchReturnInst>
4563 : public FixedNumOperandTraits<CatchReturnInst, 2> {};
4564
4565DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(CatchReturnInst, Value)CatchReturnInst::op_iterator CatchReturnInst::op_begin() { return
OperandTraits<CatchReturnInst>::op_begin(this); } CatchReturnInst
::const_op_iterator CatchReturnInst::op_begin() const { return
OperandTraits<CatchReturnInst>::op_begin(const_cast<
CatchReturnInst*>(this)); } CatchReturnInst::op_iterator CatchReturnInst
::op_end() { return OperandTraits<CatchReturnInst>::op_end
(this); } CatchReturnInst::const_op_iterator CatchReturnInst::
op_end() const { return OperandTraits<CatchReturnInst>::
op_end(const_cast<CatchReturnInst*>(this)); } Value *CatchReturnInst
::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null
<Value>( OperandTraits<CatchReturnInst>::op_begin
(const_cast<CatchReturnInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()
); } void CatchReturnInst::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value
*Val_nocapture) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<CatchReturnInst
>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned
CatchReturnInst::getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits
<CatchReturnInst>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture
> Use &CatchReturnInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<
Idx_nocapture>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture>
const Use &CatchReturnInst::Op() const { return this->
OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); }
4566
4567//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4568// CleanupReturnInst Class
4569//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4570
4571class CleanupReturnInst : public Instruction {
4572 using UnwindDestField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>;
4573
4574private:
4575 CleanupReturnInst(const CleanupReturnInst &RI);
4576 CleanupReturnInst(Value *CleanupPad, BasicBlock *UnwindBB, unsigned Values,
4577 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
4578 CleanupReturnInst(Value *CleanupPad, BasicBlock *UnwindBB, unsigned Values,
4579 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
4580
4581 void init(Value *CleanupPad, BasicBlock *UnwindBB);
4582
4583protected:
4584 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4585 friend class Instruction;
4586
4587 CleanupReturnInst *cloneImpl() const;
4588
4589public:
4590 static CleanupReturnInst *Create(Value *CleanupPad,
4591 BasicBlock *UnwindBB = nullptr,
4592 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) {
4593 assert(CleanupPad)((void)0);
4594 unsigned Values = 1;
4595 if (UnwindBB)
4596 ++Values;
4597 return new (Values)
4598 CleanupReturnInst(CleanupPad, UnwindBB, Values, InsertBefore);
4599 }
4600
4601 static CleanupReturnInst *Create(Value *CleanupPad, BasicBlock *UnwindBB,
4602 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) {
4603 assert(CleanupPad)((void)0);
4604 unsigned Values = 1;
4605 if (UnwindBB)
4606 ++Values;
4607 return new (Values)
4608 CleanupReturnInst(CleanupPad, UnwindBB, Values, InsertAtEnd);
4609 }
4610
4611 /// Provide fast operand accessors
4612 DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value)public: inline Value *getOperand(unsigned) const; inline void
setOperand(unsigned, Value*); inline op_iterator op_begin();
inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; inline op_iterator
op_end(); inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; protected
: template <int> inline Use &Op(); template <int
> inline const Use &Op() const; public: inline unsigned
getNumOperands() const
;
4613
4614 bool hasUnwindDest() const { return getSubclassData<UnwindDestField>(); }
4615 bool unwindsToCaller() const { return !hasUnwindDest(); }
4616
4617 /// Convenience accessor.
4618 CleanupPadInst *getCleanupPad() const {
4619 return cast<CleanupPadInst>(Op<0>());
4620 }
4621 void setCleanupPad(CleanupPadInst *CleanupPad) {
4622 assert(CleanupPad)((void)0);
4623 Op<0>() = CleanupPad;
4624 }
4625
4626 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return hasUnwindDest() ? 1 : 0; }
4627
4628 BasicBlock *getUnwindDest() const {
4629 return hasUnwindDest() ? cast<BasicBlock>(Op<1>()) : nullptr;
4630 }
4631 void setUnwindDest(BasicBlock *NewDest) {
4632 assert(NewDest)((void)0);
4633 assert(hasUnwindDest())((void)0);
4634 Op<1>() = NewDest;
4635 }
4636
4637 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4638 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4639 return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CleanupRet);
4640 }
4641 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4642 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4643 }
4644
4645private:
4646 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned Idx) const {
4647 assert(Idx == 0)((void)0);
4648 return getUnwindDest();
4649 }
4650
4651 void setSuccessor(unsigned Idx, BasicBlock *B) {
4652 assert(Idx == 0)((void)0);
4653 setUnwindDest(B);
4654 }
4655
4656 // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding
4657 // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
4658 template <typename Bitfield>
4659 void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) {
4660 Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value);
4661 }
4662};
4663
4664template <>
4665struct OperandTraits<CleanupReturnInst>
4666 : public VariadicOperandTraits<CleanupReturnInst, /*MINARITY=*/1> {};
4667
4668DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(CleanupReturnInst, Value)CleanupReturnInst::op_iterator CleanupReturnInst::op_begin() {
return OperandTraits<CleanupReturnInst>::op_begin(this
); } CleanupReturnInst::const_op_iterator CleanupReturnInst::
op_begin() const { return OperandTraits<CleanupReturnInst>
::op_begin(const_cast<CleanupReturnInst*>(this)); } CleanupReturnInst
::op_iterator CleanupReturnInst::op_end() { return OperandTraits
<CleanupReturnInst>::op_end(this); } CleanupReturnInst::
const_op_iterator CleanupReturnInst::op_end() const { return OperandTraits
<CleanupReturnInst>::op_end(const_cast<CleanupReturnInst
*>(this)); } Value *CleanupReturnInst::getOperand(unsigned
i_nocapture) const { ((void)0); return cast_or_null<Value
>( OperandTraits<CleanupReturnInst>::op_begin(const_cast
<CleanupReturnInst*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); } void
CleanupReturnInst::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, Value *Val_nocapture
) { ((void)0); OperandTraits<CleanupReturnInst>::op_begin
(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; } unsigned CleanupReturnInst
::getNumOperands() const { return OperandTraits<CleanupReturnInst
>::operands(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> Use
&CleanupReturnInst::Op() { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); } template <int Idx_nocapture> const Use &
CleanupReturnInst::Op() const { return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture
>(this); }
4669
4670//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4671// UnreachableInst Class
4672//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4673
4674//===---------------------------------------------------------------------------
4675/// This function has undefined behavior. In particular, the
4676/// presence of this instruction indicates some higher level knowledge that the
4677/// end of the block cannot be reached.
4678///
4679class UnreachableInst : public Instruction {
4680protected:
4681 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4682 friend class Instruction;
4683
4684 UnreachableInst *cloneImpl() const;
4685
4686public:
4687 explicit UnreachableInst(LLVMContext &C, Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
4688 explicit UnreachableInst(LLVMContext &C, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
4689
4690 // allocate space for exactly zero operands
4691 void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 0); }
4692 void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); }
4693
4694 unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 0; }
4695
4696 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4697 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4698 return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Unreachable;
4699 }
4700 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4701 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4702 }
4703
4704private:
4705 BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned idx) const {
4706 llvm_unreachable("UnreachableInst has no successors!")__builtin_unreachable();
4707 }
4708
4709 void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *B) {
4710 llvm_unreachable("UnreachableInst has no successors!")__builtin_unreachable();
4711 }
4712};
4713
4714//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4715// TruncInst Class
4716//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4717
4718/// This class represents a truncation of integer types.
4719class TruncInst : public CastInst {
4720protected:
4721 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4722 friend class Instruction;
4723
4724 /// Clone an identical TruncInst
4725 TruncInst *cloneImpl() const;
4726
4727public:
4728 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
4729 TruncInst(
4730 Value *S, ///< The value to be truncated
4731 Type *Ty, ///< The (smaller) type to truncate to
4732 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
4733 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
4734 );
4735
4736 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
4737 TruncInst(
4738 Value *S, ///< The value to be truncated
4739 Type *Ty, ///< The (smaller) type to truncate to
4740 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
4741 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
4742 );
4743
4744 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4745 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4746 return I->getOpcode() == Trunc;
4747 }
4748 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4749 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4750 }
4751};
4752
4753//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4754// ZExtInst Class
4755//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4756
4757/// This class represents zero extension of integer types.
4758class ZExtInst : public CastInst {
4759protected:
4760 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4761 friend class Instruction;
4762
4763 /// Clone an identical ZExtInst
4764 ZExtInst *cloneImpl() const;
4765
4766public:
4767 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
4768 ZExtInst(
4769 Value *S, ///< The value to be zero extended
4770 Type *Ty, ///< The type to zero extend to
4771 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
4772 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
4773 );
4774
4775 /// Constructor with insert-at-end semantics.
4776 ZExtInst(
4777 Value *S, ///< The value to be zero extended
4778 Type *Ty, ///< The type to zero extend to
4779 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
4780 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
4781 );
4782
4783 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4784 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4785 return I->getOpcode() == ZExt;
4786 }
4787 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4788 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4789 }
4790};
4791
4792//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4793// SExtInst Class
4794//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4795
4796/// This class represents a sign extension of integer types.
4797class SExtInst : public CastInst {
4798protected:
4799 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4800 friend class Instruction;
4801
4802 /// Clone an identical SExtInst
4803 SExtInst *cloneImpl() const;
4804
4805public:
4806 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
4807 SExtInst(
4808 Value *S, ///< The value to be sign extended
4809 Type *Ty, ///< The type to sign extend to
4810 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
4811 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
4812 );
4813
4814 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
4815 SExtInst(
4816 Value *S, ///< The value to be sign extended
4817 Type *Ty, ///< The type to sign extend to
4818 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
4819 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
4820 );
4821
4822 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4823 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4824 return I->getOpcode() == SExt;
4825 }
4826 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4827 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4828 }
4829};
4830
4831//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4832// FPTruncInst Class
4833//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4834
4835/// This class represents a truncation of floating point types.
4836class FPTruncInst : public CastInst {
4837protected:
4838 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4839 friend class Instruction;
4840
4841 /// Clone an identical FPTruncInst
4842 FPTruncInst *cloneImpl() const;
4843
4844public:
4845 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
4846 FPTruncInst(
4847 Value *S, ///< The value to be truncated
4848 Type *Ty, ///< The type to truncate to
4849 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
4850 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
4851 );
4852
4853 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
4854 FPTruncInst(
4855 Value *S, ///< The value to be truncated
4856 Type *Ty, ///< The type to truncate to
4857 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
4858 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
4859 );
4860
4861 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4862 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4863 return I->getOpcode() == FPTrunc;
4864 }
4865 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4866 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4867 }
4868};
4869
4870//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4871// FPExtInst Class
4872//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4873
4874/// This class represents an extension of floating point types.
4875class FPExtInst : public CastInst {
4876protected:
4877 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4878 friend class Instruction;
4879
4880 /// Clone an identical FPExtInst
4881 FPExtInst *cloneImpl() const;
4882
4883public:
4884 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
4885 FPExtInst(
4886 Value *S, ///< The value to be extended
4887 Type *Ty, ///< The type to extend to
4888 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
4889 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
4890 );
4891
4892 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
4893 FPExtInst(
4894 Value *S, ///< The value to be extended
4895 Type *Ty, ///< The type to extend to
4896 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
4897 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
4898 );
4899
4900 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4901 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4902 return I->getOpcode() == FPExt;
4903 }
4904 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4905 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4906 }
4907};
4908
4909//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4910// UIToFPInst Class
4911//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4912
4913/// This class represents a cast unsigned integer to floating point.
4914class UIToFPInst : public CastInst {
4915protected:
4916 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4917 friend class Instruction;
4918
4919 /// Clone an identical UIToFPInst
4920 UIToFPInst *cloneImpl() const;
4921
4922public:
4923 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
4924 UIToFPInst(
4925 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
4926 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
4927 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
4928 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
4929 );
4930
4931 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
4932 UIToFPInst(
4933 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
4934 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
4935 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
4936 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
4937 );
4938
4939 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4940 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4941 return I->getOpcode() == UIToFP;
4942 }
4943 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4944 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4945 }
4946};
4947
4948//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4949// SIToFPInst Class
4950//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4951
4952/// This class represents a cast from signed integer to floating point.
4953class SIToFPInst : public CastInst {
4954protected:
4955 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4956 friend class Instruction;
4957
4958 /// Clone an identical SIToFPInst
4959 SIToFPInst *cloneImpl() const;
4960
4961public:
4962 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
4963 SIToFPInst(
4964 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
4965 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
4966 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
4967 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
4968 );
4969
4970 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
4971 SIToFPInst(
4972 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
4973 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
4974 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
4975 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
4976 );
4977
4978 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
4979 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
4980 return I->getOpcode() == SIToFP;
4981 }
4982 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
4983 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
4984 }
4985};
4986
4987//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4988// FPToUIInst Class
4989//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4990
4991/// This class represents a cast from floating point to unsigned integer
4992class FPToUIInst : public CastInst {
4993protected:
4994 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
4995 friend class Instruction;
4996
4997 /// Clone an identical FPToUIInst
4998 FPToUIInst *cloneImpl() const;
4999
5000public:
5001 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
5002 FPToUIInst(
5003 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
5004 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
5005 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
5006 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
5007 );
5008
5009 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
5010 FPToUIInst(
5011 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
5012 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
5013 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
5014 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< Where to insert the new instruction
5015 );
5016
5017 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
5018 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
5019 return I->getOpcode() == FPToUI;
5020 }
5021 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
5022 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
5023 }
5024};
5025
5026//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5027// FPToSIInst Class
5028//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5029
5030/// This class represents a cast from floating point to signed integer.
5031class FPToSIInst : public CastInst {
5032protected:
5033 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
5034 friend class Instruction;
5035
5036 /// Clone an identical FPToSIInst
5037 FPToSIInst *cloneImpl() const;
5038
5039public:
5040 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
5041 FPToSIInst(
5042 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
5043 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
5044 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
5045 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
5046 );
5047
5048 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
5049 FPToSIInst(
5050 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
5051 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
5052 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
5053 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
5054 );
5055
5056 /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
5057 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
5058 return I->getOpcode() == FPToSI;
5059 }
5060 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
5061 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
5062 }
5063};
5064
5065//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5066// IntToPtrInst Class
5067//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5068
5069/// This class represents a cast from an integer to a pointer.
5070class IntToPtrInst : public CastInst {
5071public:
5072 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
5073 friend class Instruction;
5074
5075 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
5076 IntToPtrInst(
5077 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
5078 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
5079 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
5080 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
5081 );
5082
5083 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
5084 IntToPtrInst(
5085 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
5086 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
5087 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
5088 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
5089 );
5090
5091 /// Clone an identical IntToPtrInst.
5092 IntToPtrInst *cloneImpl() const;
5093
5094 /// Returns the address space of this instruction's pointer type.
5095 unsigned getAddressSpace() const {
5096 return getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
5097 }
5098
5099 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
5100 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
5101 return I->getOpcode() == IntToPtr;
5102 }
5103 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
5104 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
5105 }
5106};
5107
5108//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5109// PtrToIntInst Class
5110//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5111
5112/// This class represents a cast from a pointer to an integer.
5113class PtrToIntInst : public CastInst {
5114protected:
5115 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
5116 friend class Instruction;
5117
5118 /// Clone an identical PtrToIntInst.
5119 PtrToIntInst *cloneImpl() const;
5120
5121public:
5122 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
5123 PtrToIntInst(
5124 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
5125 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
5126 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
5127 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
5128 );
5129
5130 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
5131 PtrToIntInst(
5132 Value *S, ///< The value to be converted
5133 Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to
5134 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
5135 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
5136 );
5137
5138 /// Gets the pointer operand.
5139 Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(0); }
5140 /// Gets the pointer operand.
5141 const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(0); }
5142 /// Gets the operand index of the pointer operand.
5143 static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 0U; }
5144
5145 /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand.
5146 unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const {
5147 return getPointerOperand()->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
5148 }
5149
5150 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
5151 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
5152 return I->getOpcode() == PtrToInt;
5153 }
5154 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
5155 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
5156 }
5157};
5158
5159//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5160// BitCastInst Class
5161//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5162
5163/// This class represents a no-op cast from one type to another.
5164class BitCastInst : public CastInst {
5165protected:
5166 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
5167 friend class Instruction;
5168
5169 /// Clone an identical BitCastInst.
5170 BitCastInst *cloneImpl() const;
5171
5172public:
5173 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
5174 BitCastInst(
5175 Value *S, ///< The value to be casted
5176 Type *Ty, ///< The type to casted to
5177 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
5178 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
5179 );
5180
5181 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
5182 BitCastInst(
5183 Value *S, ///< The value to be casted
5184 Type *Ty, ///< The type to casted to
5185 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
5186 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
5187 );
5188
5189 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
5190 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
5191 return I->getOpcode() == BitCast;
5192 }
5193 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
5194 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
5195 }
5196};
5197
5198//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5199// AddrSpaceCastInst Class
5200//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5201
5202/// This class represents a conversion between pointers from one address space
5203/// to another.
5204class AddrSpaceCastInst : public CastInst {
5205protected:
5206 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
5207 friend class Instruction;
5208
5209 /// Clone an identical AddrSpaceCastInst.
5210 AddrSpaceCastInst *cloneImpl() const;
5211
5212public:
5213 /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics
5214 AddrSpaceCastInst(
5215 Value *S, ///< The value to be casted
5216 Type *Ty, ///< The type to casted to
5217 const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction
5218 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction
5219 );
5220
5221 /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics
5222 AddrSpaceCastInst(
5223 Value *S, ///< The value to be casted
5224 Type *Ty, ///< The type to casted to
5225 const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction
5226 BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into
5227 );
5228
5229 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
5230 static bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
5231 return I->getOpcode() == AddrSpaceCast;
5232 }
5233 static bool classof(const Value *V) {
5234 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
5235 }
5236
5237 /// Gets the pointer operand.
5238 Value *getPointerOperand() {
5239 return getOperand(0);
5240 }
5241
5242 /// Gets the pointer operand.
5243 const Value *getPointerOperand() const {
5244 return getOperand(0);
5245 }
5246
5247 /// Gets the operand index of the pointer operand.
5248 static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() {
5249 return 0U;
5250 }
5251
5252 /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand.
5253 unsigned getSrcAddressSpace() const {
5254 return getPointerOperand()->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
5255 }
5256
5257 /// Returns the address space of the result.
5258 unsigned getDestAddressSpace() const {
5259 return getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
5260 }
5261};
5262
5263/// A helper function that returns the pointer operand of a load or store
5264/// instruction. Returns nullptr if not load or store.
5265inline const Value *getLoadStorePointerOperand(const Value *V) {
5266 if (auto *Load = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(V))
5267 return Load->getPointerOperand();
5268 if (auto *Store = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(V))
5269 return Store->getPointerOperand();
5270 return nullptr;
5271}
5272inline Value *getLoadStorePointerOperand(Value *V) {
5273 return const_cast<Value *>(
5274 getLoadStorePointerOperand(static_cast<const Value *>(V)));
5275}
5276
5277/// A helper function that returns the pointer operand of a load, store
5278/// or GEP instruction. Returns nullptr if not load, store, or GEP.
5279inline const Value *getPointerOperand(const Value *V) {
5280 if (auto *Ptr = getLoadStorePointerOperand(V))
5281 return Ptr;
5282 if (auto *Gep = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(V))
5283 return Gep->getPointerOperand();
5284 return nullptr;
5285}
5286inline Value *getPointerOperand(Value *V) {
5287 return const_cast<Value *>(getPointerOperand(static_cast<const Value *>(V)));
5288}
5289
5290/// A helper function that returns the alignment of load or store instruction.
5291inline Align getLoadStoreAlignment(Value *I) {
5292 assert((isa<LoadInst>(I) || isa<StoreInst>(I)) &&((void)0)
5293 "Expected Load or Store instruction")((void)0);
5294 if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I))
5295 return LI->getAlign();
5296 return cast<StoreInst>(I)->getAlign();
5297}
5298
5299/// A helper function that returns the address space of the pointer operand of
5300/// load or store instruction.
5301inline unsigned getLoadStoreAddressSpace(Value *I) {
5302 assert((isa<LoadInst>(I) || isa<StoreInst>(I)) &&((void)0)
5303 "Expected Load or Store instruction")((void)0);
5304 if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I))
5305 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace();
5306 return cast<StoreInst>(I)->getPointerAddressSpace();
5307}
5308
5309/// A helper function that returns the type of a load or store instruction.
5310inline Type *getLoadStoreType(Value *I) {
5311 assert((isa<LoadInst>(I) || isa<StoreInst>(I)) &&((void)0)
5312 "Expected Load or Store instruction")((void)0);
5313 if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I))
5314 return LI->getType();
5315 return cast<StoreInst>(I)->getValueOperand()->getType();
5316}
5317
5318//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5319// FreezeInst Class
5320//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5321
5322/// This class represents a freeze function that returns random concrete
5323/// value if an operand is either a poison value or an undef value
5324class FreezeInst : public UnaryInstruction {
5325protected:
5326 // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl.
5327 friend class Instruction;
5328
5329 /// Clone an identical FreezeInst
5330 FreezeInst *cloneImpl() const;
5331
5332public:
5333 explicit FreezeInst(Value *S,
5334 const Twine &NameStr = "",
5335 Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr);
5336 FreezeInst(Value *S, const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
5337
5338 // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
5339 static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
5340 return I->getOpcode() == Freeze;
5341 }
5342 static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
5343 return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
5344 }
5345};
5346
5347} // end namespace llvm
5348
5349#endif // LLVM_IR_INSTRUCTIONS_H

/usr/src/gnu/usr.bin/clang/libLLVM/../../../llvm/llvm/include/llvm/Support/Casting.h

1//===- llvm/Support/Casting.h - Allow flexible, checked, casts --*- C++ -*-===//
2//
3// Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions.
4// See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information.
5// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception
6//
7//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
8//
9// This file defines the isa<X>(), cast<X>(), dyn_cast<X>(), cast_or_null<X>(),
10// and dyn_cast_or_null<X>() templates.
11//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#ifndef LLVM_SUPPORT_CASTING_H
15#define LLVM_SUPPORT_CASTING_H
16
17#include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h"
18#include "llvm/Support/type_traits.h"
19#include <cassert>
20#include <memory>
21#include <type_traits>
22
23namespace llvm {
24
25//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
26// isa<x> Support Templates
27//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
28
29// Define a template that can be specialized by smart pointers to reflect the
30// fact that they are automatically dereferenced, and are not involved with the
31// template selection process... the default implementation is a noop.
32//
33template<typename From> struct simplify_type {
34 using SimpleType = From; // The real type this represents...
35
36 // An accessor to get the real value...
37 static SimpleType &getSimplifiedValue(From &Val) { return Val; }
38};
39
40template<typename From> struct simplify_type<const From> {
41 using NonConstSimpleType = typename simplify_type<From>::SimpleType;
42 using SimpleType =
43 typename add_const_past_pointer<NonConstSimpleType>::type;
44 using RetType =
45 typename add_lvalue_reference_if_not_pointer<SimpleType>::type;
46
47 static RetType getSimplifiedValue(const From& Val) {
48 return simplify_type<From>::getSimplifiedValue(const_cast<From&>(Val));
49 }
50};
51
52// The core of the implementation of isa<X> is here; To and From should be
53// the names of classes. This template can be specialized to customize the
54// implementation of isa<> without rewriting it from scratch.
55template <typename To, typename From, typename Enabler = void>
56struct isa_impl {
57 static inline bool doit(const From &Val) {
58 return To::classof(&Val);
59 }
60};
61
62/// Always allow upcasts, and perform no dynamic check for them.
63template <typename To, typename From>
64struct isa_impl<To, From, std::enable_if_t<std::is_base_of<To, From>::value>> {
65 static inline bool doit(const From &) { return true; }
66};
67
68template <typename To, typename From> struct isa_impl_cl {
69 static inline bool doit(const From &Val) {
70 return isa_impl<To, From>::doit(Val);
71 }
72};
73
74template <typename To, typename From> struct isa_impl_cl<To, const From> {
75 static inline bool doit(const From &Val) {
76 return isa_impl<To, From>::doit(Val);
77 }
78};
79
80template <typename To, typename From>
81struct isa_impl_cl<To, const std::unique_ptr<From>> {
82 static inline bool doit(const std::unique_ptr<From> &Val) {
83 assert(Val && "isa<> used on a null pointer")((void)0);
84 return isa_impl_cl<To, From>::doit(*Val);
85 }
86};
87
88template <typename To, typename From> struct isa_impl_cl<To, From*> {
89 static inline bool doit(const From *Val) {
90 assert(Val && "isa<> used on a null pointer")((void)0);
91 return isa_impl<To, From>::doit(*Val);
92 }
93};
94
95template <typename To, typename From> struct isa_impl_cl<To, From*const> {
96 static inline bool doit(const From *Val) {
97 assert(Val && "isa<> used on a null pointer")((void)0);
98 return isa_impl<To, From>::doit(*Val);
99 }
100};
101
102template <typename To, typename From> struct isa_impl_cl<To, const From*> {
103 static inline bool doit(const From *Val) {
104 assert(Val && "isa<> used on a null pointer")((void)0);
105 return isa_impl<To, From>::doit(*Val);
106 }
107};
108
109template <typename To, typename From> struct isa_impl_cl<To, const From*const> {
110 static inline bool doit(const From *Val) {
111 assert(Val && "isa<> used on a null pointer")((void)0);
112 return isa_impl<To, From>::doit(*Val);
113 }
114};
115
116template<typename To, typename From, typename SimpleFrom>
117struct isa_impl_wrap {
118 // When From != SimplifiedType, we can simplify the type some more by using
119 // the simplify_type template.
120 static bool doit(const From &Val) {
121 return isa_impl_wrap<To, SimpleFrom,
122 typename simplify_type<SimpleFrom>::SimpleType>::doit(
123 simplify_type<const From>::getSimplifiedValue(Val));
124 }
125};
126
127template<typename To, typename FromTy>
128struct isa_impl_wrap<To, FromTy, FromTy> {
129 // When From == SimpleType, we are as simple as we are going to get.
130 static bool doit(const FromTy &Val) {
131 return isa_impl_cl<To,FromTy>::doit(Val);
132 }
133};
134
135// isa<X> - Return true if the parameter to the template is an instance of one
136// of the template type arguments. Used like this:
137//
138// if (isa<Type>(myVal)) { ... }
139// if (isa<Type0, Type1, Type2>(myVal)) { ... }
140//
141template <class X, class Y> LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline bool isa(const Y &Val) {
142 return isa_impl_wrap<X, const Y,
143 typename simplify_type<const Y>::SimpleType>::doit(Val);
144}
145
146template <typename First, typename Second, typename... Rest, typename Y>
147LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline bool isa(const Y &Val) {
148 return isa<First>(Val) || isa<Second, Rest...>(Val);
149}
150
151// isa_and_nonnull<X> - Functionally identical to isa, except that a null value
152// is accepted.
153//
154template <typename... X, class Y>
155LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline bool isa_and_nonnull(const Y &Val) {
156 if (!Val)
157 return false;
158 return isa<X...>(Val);
159}
160
161//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
162// cast<x> Support Templates
163//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
164
165template<class To, class From> struct cast_retty;
166
167// Calculate what type the 'cast' function should return, based on a requested
168// type of To and a source type of From.
169template<class To, class From> struct cast_retty_impl {
170 using ret_type = To &; // Normal case, return Ty&
171};
172template<class To, class From> struct cast_retty_impl<To, const From> {
173 using ret_type = const To &; // Normal case, return Ty&
174};
175
176template<class To, class From> struct cast_retty_impl<To, From*> {
177 using ret_type = To *; // Pointer arg case, return Ty*
178};
179
180template<class To, class From> struct cast_retty_impl<To, const From*> {
181 using ret_type = const To *; // Constant pointer arg case, return const Ty*
182};
183
184template<class To, class From> struct cast_retty_impl<To, const From*const> {
185 using ret_type = const To *; // Constant pointer arg case, return const Ty*
186};
187
188template <class To, class From>
189struct cast_retty_impl<To, std::unique_ptr<From>> {
190private:
191 using PointerType = typename cast_retty_impl<To, From *>::ret_type;
192 using ResultType = std::remove_pointer_t<PointerType>;
193
194public:
195 using ret_type = std::unique_ptr<ResultType>;
196};
197
198template<class To, class From, class SimpleFrom>
199struct cast_retty_wrap {
200 // When the simplified type and the from type are not the same, use the type
201 // simplifier to reduce the type, then reuse cast_retty_impl to get the
202 // resultant type.
203 using ret_type = typename cast_retty<To, SimpleFrom>::ret_type;
204};
205
206template<class To, class FromTy>
207struct cast_retty_wrap<To, FromTy, FromTy> {
208 // When the simplified type is equal to the from type, use it directly.
209 using ret_type = typename cast_retty_impl<To,FromTy>::ret_type;
210};
211
212template<class To, class From>
213struct cast_retty {
214 using ret_type = typename cast_retty_wrap<
215 To, From, typename simplify_type<From>::SimpleType>::ret_type;
216};
217
218// Ensure the non-simple values are converted using the simplify_type template
219// that may be specialized by smart pointers...
220//
221template<class To, class From, class SimpleFrom> struct cast_convert_val {
222 // This is not a simple type, use the template to simplify it...
223 static typename cast_retty<To, From>::ret_type doit(From &Val) {
224 return cast_convert_val<To, SimpleFrom,
15
Calling 'cast_convert_val::doit'
18
Returning from 'cast_convert_val::doit'
19
Returning pointer
225 typename simplify_type<SimpleFrom>::SimpleType>::doit(
226 simplify_type<From>::getSimplifiedValue(Val));
13
Assigning value
14
Passing value via 1st parameter 'Val'
227 }
228};
229
230template<class To, class FromTy> struct cast_convert_val<To,FromTy,FromTy> {
231 // This _is_ a simple type, just cast it.
232 static typename cast_retty<To, FromTy>::ret_type doit(const FromTy &Val) {
233 typename cast_retty<To, FromTy>::ret_type Res2
16
'Res2' initialized here
234 = (typename cast_retty<To, FromTy>::ret_type)const_cast<FromTy&>(Val);
235 return Res2;
17
Returning pointer (loaded from 'Res2')
236 }
237};
238
239template <class X> struct is_simple_type {
240 static const bool value =
241 std::is_same<X, typename simplify_type<X>::SimpleType>::value;
242};
243
244// cast<X> - Return the argument parameter cast to the specified type. This
245// casting operator asserts that the type is correct, so it does not return null
246// on failure. It does not allow a null argument (use cast_or_null for that).
247// It is typically used like this:
248//
249// cast<Instruction>(myVal)->getParent()
250//
251template <class X, class Y>
252inline std::enable_if_t<!is_simple_type<Y>::value,
253 typename cast_retty<X, const Y>::ret_type>
254cast(const Y &Val) {
255 assert(isa<X>(Val) && "cast<Ty>() argument of incompatible type!")((void)0);
256 return cast_convert_val<
12
Calling 'cast_convert_val::doit'
20
Returning from 'cast_convert_val::doit'
21
Returning pointer
257 X, const Y, typename simplify_type<const Y>::SimpleType>::doit(Val);
258}
259
260template <class X, class Y>
261inline typename cast_retty<X, Y>::ret_type cast(Y &Val) {
262 assert(isa<X>(Val) && "cast<Ty>() argument of incompatible type!")((void)0);
263 return cast_convert_val<X, Y,
264 typename simplify_type<Y>::SimpleType>::doit(Val);
265}
266
267template <class X, class Y>
268inline typename cast_retty<X, Y *>::ret_type cast(Y *Val) {
269 assert(isa<X>(Val) && "cast<Ty>() argument of incompatible type!")((void)0);
270 return cast_convert_val<X, Y*,
271 typename simplify_type<Y*>::SimpleType>::doit(Val);
272}
273
274template <class X, class Y>
275inline typename cast_retty<X, std::unique_ptr<Y>>::ret_type
276cast(std::unique_ptr<Y> &&Val) {
277 assert(isa<X>(Val.get()) && "cast<Ty>() argument of incompatible type!")((void)0);
278 using ret_type = typename cast_retty<X, std::unique_ptr<Y>>::ret_type;
279 return ret_type(
280 cast_convert_val<X, Y *, typename simplify_type<Y *>::SimpleType>::doit(
281 Val.release()));
282}
283
284// cast_or_null<X> - Functionally identical to cast, except that a null value is
285// accepted.
286//
287template <class X, class Y>
288LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline std::enable_if_t<
289 !is_simple_type<Y>::value, typename cast_retty<X, const Y>::ret_type>
290cast_or_null(const Y &Val) {
291 if (!Val)
292 return nullptr;
293 assert(isa<X>(Val) && "cast_or_null<Ty>() argument of incompatible type!")((void)0);
294 return cast<X>(Val);
295}
296
297template <class X, class Y>
298LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline std::enable_if_t<!is_simple_type<Y>::value,
299 typename cast_retty<X, Y>::ret_type>
300cast_or_null(Y &Val) {
301 if (!Val)
302 return nullptr;
303 assert(isa<X>(Val) && "cast_or_null<Ty>() argument of incompatible type!")((void)0);
304 return cast<X>(Val);
305}
306
307template <class X, class Y>
308LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline typename cast_retty<X, Y *>::ret_type
309cast_or_null(Y *Val) {
310 if (!Val) return nullptr;
311 assert(isa<X>(Val) && "cast_or_null<Ty>() argument of incompatible type!")((void)0);
312 return cast<X>(Val);
313}
314
315template <class X, class Y>
316inline typename cast_retty<X, std::unique_ptr<Y>>::ret_type
317cast_or_null(std::unique_ptr<Y> &&Val) {
318 if (!Val)
319 return nullptr;
320 return cast<X>(std::move(Val));
321}
322
323// dyn_cast<X> - Return the argument parameter cast to the specified type. This
324// casting operator returns null if the argument is of the wrong type, so it can
325// be used to test for a type as well as cast if successful. This should be
326// used in the context of an if statement like this:
327//
328// if (const Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(myVal)) { ... }
329//
330
331template <class X, class Y>
332LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline std::enable_if_t<
333 !is_simple_type<Y>::value, typename cast_retty<X, const Y>::ret_type>
334dyn_cast(const Y &Val) {
335 return isa<X>(Val) ? cast<X>(Val) : nullptr;
336}
337
338template <class X, class Y>
339LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline typename cast_retty<X, Y>::ret_type dyn_cast(Y &Val) {
340 return isa<X>(Val) ? cast<X>(Val) : nullptr;
341}
342
343template <class X, class Y>
344LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline typename cast_retty<X, Y *>::ret_type dyn_cast(Y *Val) {
345 return isa<X>(Val) ? cast<X>(Val) : nullptr;
346}
347
348// dyn_cast_or_null<X> - Functionally identical to dyn_cast, except that a null
349// value is accepted.
350//
351template <class X, class Y>
352LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline std::enable_if_t<
353 !is_simple_type<Y>::value, typename cast_retty<X, const Y>::ret_type>
354dyn_cast_or_null(const Y &Val) {
355 return (Val && isa<X>(Val)) ? cast<X>(Val) : nullptr;
356}
357
358template <class X, class Y>
359LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline std::enable_if_t<!is_simple_type<Y>::value,
360 typename cast_retty<X, Y>::ret_type>
361dyn_cast_or_null(Y &Val) {
362 return (Val && isa<X>(Val)) ? cast<X>(Val) : nullptr;
363}
364
365template <class X, class Y>
366LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline typename cast_retty<X, Y *>::ret_type
367dyn_cast_or_null(Y *Val) {
368 return (Val && isa<X>(Val)) ? cast<X>(Val) : nullptr;
369}
370
371// unique_dyn_cast<X> - Given a unique_ptr<Y>, try to return a unique_ptr<X>,
372// taking ownership of the input pointer iff isa<X>(Val) is true. If the
373// cast is successful, From refers to nullptr on exit and the casted value
374// is returned. If the cast is unsuccessful, the function returns nullptr
375// and From is unchanged.
376template <class X, class Y>
377LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline auto unique_dyn_cast(std::unique_ptr<Y> &Val)
378 -> decltype(cast<X>(Val)) {
379 if (!isa<X>(Val))
380 return nullptr;
381 return cast<X>(std::move(Val));
382}
383
384template <class X, class Y>
385LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline auto unique_dyn_cast(std::unique_ptr<Y> &&Val) {
386 return unique_dyn_cast<X, Y>(Val);
387}
388
389// dyn_cast_or_null<X> - Functionally identical to unique_dyn_cast, except that
390// a null value is accepted.
391template <class X, class Y>
392LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline auto unique_dyn_cast_or_null(std::unique_ptr<Y> &Val)
393 -> decltype(cast<X>(Val)) {
394 if (!Val)
395 return nullptr;
396 return unique_dyn_cast<X, Y>(Val);
397}
398
399template <class X, class Y>
400LLVM_NODISCARD[[clang::warn_unused_result]] inline auto unique_dyn_cast_or_null(std::unique_ptr<Y> &&Val) {
401 return unique_dyn_cast_or_null<X, Y>(Val);
402}
403
404} // end namespace llvm
405
406#endif // LLVM_SUPPORT_CASTING_H